Document
FORM 6-K
 
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

 
Washington, D.C. 20549

 
Report of Foreign Private Issuer
 
Pursuant to Rule 13a - 16 or 15d - 16 of


the Securities Exchange Act of 1934

Commission File Number: 001-14930


For the month of February 2017
 
HSBC Holdings plc
 
42nd Floor, 8 Canada Square, London E14 5HQ, England
 
(Indicate by check mark whether the registrant files or will file annual reports under cover of Form 20-F or Form 40-F).
 
Form 20-F   X              Form 40-F ......
 
Indicate by check mark if the registrant is submitting the Form 6-K in paper as permitted by Regulation S-T Rule 101(b)(1): ......

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is submitting the Form 6-K in paper as permitted by Regulation S-T Rule 101(b)(7): ......

(Indicate by check mark whether the registrant by furnishing the information contained in this Form is also thereby furnishing the information to the Commission pursuant to Rule 12g3-2(b) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934).
 
Yes .......          No    X
 
(If "Yes" is marked, indicate below the file number assigned to the registrant in connection with Rule 12g3-2(b): 82- ).

Contents
 
Page

Tables
2

Regulatory framework for disclosures
3

Pillar 3 disclosures
3

Regulatory developments
3

Risk management
4

Linkage to the Annual Report and Accounts 2016
5

Capital and RWAs
 
Capital management
13

Own funds
13

Leverage ratio
15

Pillar 1 capital requirements and RWA flow
17

Pillar 2 and ICAAP
20

Credit risk
 
Overview and responsibilities
21

Credit risk management
21

Credit risk models governance
21

Credit quality of assets
22

Risk mitigation
33

Global risk
37

Wholesale risk
38

Retail risk
43

Counterparty credit risk
 
Counterparty credit risk management
50

Securitisation
 
Group securitisation strategy
53

Group securitisation roles
53

Monitoring of securitisation positions
54

Securitisation accounting treatment
54

Securitisation regulatory treatment
54

Analysis of securitisation exposures
54

Market risk
 
Overview of market risk in global businesses
56

Market risk governance
56

Market risk measures
56

Market risk capital models
59

Prudent valuation adjustment
60

Structural foreign exchange exposures
60

Interest rate risk in the banking book
60

Operational risk
 
Overview and objectives
62

Organisation and responsibilities
62

Measurement and monitoring
63

Other risks
 
Pension risk
63

Non-trading book exposures in equities
63

Risk management of insurance operations
64

Liquidity and funding risk
64

Reputational risk
65

Sustainability risk
65

Business risk
65

Dilution risk
65

Remuneration
65

 
Appendices
 
 
 
Page

I
Additional CRD IV and BCBS tables
66

II
Simplified organisation chart for regulatory purposes
98

III
Asset encumbrance
99

IV
Summary of disclosures withheld
100

Other Information
 
Abbreviations
101

Cautionary statement regarding forward-looking statements
103

Contacts
103


Certain defined terms
Unless the context requires otherwise, ‘HSBC Holdings’ means HSBC Holdings plc and ‘HSBC’, the ‘Group’, ‘we’, ‘us’ and ‘our’ refer to HSBC Holdings together with its subsidiaries. Within this document the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region of the People’s Republic of China is referred to as ‘Hong Kong’. When used in the terms ‘shareholders’ equity’ and ‘total shareholders’ equity’, ‘shareholders’ means holders of HSBC Holdings ordinary shares and those preference shares and capital securities issued by HSBC Holdings classified as equity. The abbreviations ‘$m’ and ‘$bn’ represent millions and billions(thousands of millions) of US dollars, respectively.




Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Tables
 
 
Page

1

Reconciliation of balance sheets – financial accounting to regulatory scope of consolidation
6

2

Principal entities with a different regulatory and accounting scope of consolidation
10

3

Mapping of financial statement categories with regulatory risk categories
11

4

Main sources of differences between regulatory exposure values and carrying values in financial statements
12

5

Own funds disclosure
13

6

Summary reconciliation of accounting assets and leverage ratio exposures
15

7

Leverage ratio common disclosure
16

8

Leverage ratio – Split of on-balance sheet exposures (excluding derivatives, SFTs and exempted exposures)
16

9

Total RWAs by risk type
18

10

Overview of RWAs
18

11

RWA flow statements of credit risk exposures under IRB
19

12

RWA flow statements of CCR exposures under IMM
19

13

RWA flow statements of market risk exposures under an IMA
20

14

Credit quality of assets
22

15

Credit risk exposure – summary
22

16

Credit risk exposure – by geographical region
24

17

Credit risk RWAs – by geographical region
26

18

Credit risk exposure – by industry sector
28

19

Credit risk exposure – by maturity
30

20

Ageing analysis of accounting past due and not impaired exposures
31

21

Breakdown of renegotiated exposures between impaired and non-impaired exposures
32

22

Amount of impaired exposures and related allowances, broken down by geographical region
32

23

Movement in specific credit risk adjustments by industry and geographical region
33

24

Credit risk mitigation techniques – overview
35

25

Standardised approach – credit risk exposure and Credit Risk Mitigation (CRM) effects
35

26

Standardised approach – exposures by asset classes and risk weights
36

27

IRB – Effect on RWA of credit derivatives used as CRM techniques
36

28

Credit derivatives exposures
37

29

Wholesale IRB credit risk models
40

30

IRB models – estimated and actual values (wholesale)¹
41

31

IRB models – corporate PD models – performance by CRR grade
41

32

Material retail IRB risk rating systems
44

 
 
 
 
 
 
Page
33

Retail IRB exposures secured by mortgages on immovable property (non-SME)
46

34

IRB models – estimated and actual values (retail)
47

35

Wholesale IRB exposure – Back-testing of probability of default (PD) per portfolio¹
48

36

Retail IRB exposure – Back-testing of probability of default (PD) per portfolio¹
49

37

Counterparty credit risk exposure – by exposure class, product and geographical region
51

38

Counterparty credit risk – RWAs by exposure class, product and geographical region
52

39

Securitisation exposure – movement in the year
55

40

Securitisation – asset values and impairments
55

41

Market risk under standardised approach
56

42

Market risk models
59

43

IMA values for trading portfolios
59

44

Operational risk RWAs
62

45

Non-trading book equity investments
63

46

Wholesale IRB exposure – by obligor grade
66

47

PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country
69

48

Retail IRB exposure – by internal PD band
83

49

IRB expected loss and CRAs – by exposure class
85

50

IRB expected loss and CRAs – by region
85

51

IRB exposure – credit risk mitigation
86

52

Standardised exposure – credit risk mitigation
86

53

Standardised exposure – by credit quality step
87

54

Changes in stock of defaulted loans and debt securities
88

55

IRB – Credit risk exposures by portfolio and PD range
88

56

Specialised lending – Slotting only
92

57

Analysis of counterparty credit risk (CCR) exposure by approach (excluding centrally cleared exposures)
92

58

Credit valuation adjustment (CVA) capital charge
92

59

Standardised approach – CCR exposures by regulatory portfolio and risk weights
93

60

IRB – CCR exposures by portfolio and PD scale
93

61

Composition of collateral for CCR exposure
94

62

Exposures to central counterparties
94

63

Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book
94

64

Securitisation exposures in the trading book
95

65

Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated regulatory capital requirements – bank acting as originator or as sponsor
95

66

Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated capital requirements – bank acting as investor
96

67

Asset encumbrance
99




2
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Regulatory framework for disclosures
HSBC is supervised on a consolidated basis in the United Kingdom (‘UK’) by the Prudential Regulation Authority (‘PRA’), which receives information on the capital adequacy of, and sets capital requirements for, the Group as a whole. Individual banking subsidiaries are directly regulated by their local banking supervisors, who set and monitor their local capital adequacy requirements. In most jurisdictions, non-banking financial subsidiaries are also subject to the supervision and capital requirements of local regulatory authorities.
At a consolidated group level, we calculated capital for prudential regulatory reporting purposes throughout 2016 using the Basel III framework of the Basel Committee as implemented by the European Union (‘EU’) in the amended Capital Requirements Directive and Regulation (‘CRD IV’), and in the PRA’s Rulebook for the UK banking industry. The regulators of Group banking entities outside the EU are at varying stages of implementation of the Basel Committee’s framework, so local regulation in 2016 may have been on the basis of Basel I, II or III.
The Basel Committee’s framework is structured around three ‘pillars’: the Pillar 1 minimum capital requirements and Pillar 2 supervisory review process are complemented by Pillar 3 market discipline. The aim of Pillar 3 is to produce disclosures that allow market participants to assess the scope of application by banks of the Basel Committee’s framework and the rules in their jurisdiction, their capital condition, risk exposures and risk management processes, and hence their capital adequacy.
Pillar 3 requires all material risks to be disclosed, enabling a comprehensive view of a bank’s risk profile.
The PRA’s final rules adopted national discretions in order to accelerate significantly the transition timetable to full ‘end point’ CRD IV compliance.
Pillar 3 disclosures
HSBC’s Pillar 3 disclosures 2016 comprise all information required under Pillar 3, both quantitative and qualitative. They are made in accordance with Part 8 of the Capital Requirements Regulation within CRD IV. Additionally, we have implemented Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (‘BCBS’) final standards on revised Pillar 3 disclosures issued in January 2015. These disclosures are supplemented by specific additional requirements of the PRA and discretionary disclosures on our part.
The Pillar 3 disclosures are governed by the Group’s disclosure policy framework as approved by the Group Audit Committee (‘GAC’). Information relating to the rationale for withholding certain disclosures is provided in Appendix IV.
In our disclosures, to give insight into movements during the year, we provide comparative figures for the previous year, analytical review of variances and ‘flow’ tables for capital requirements. Geographical comparative data for Europe and Middle East and North Africa (‘MENA’) have been re-presented to reflect the management oversight provided by the MENA region following the management services agreement entered into by HSBC Bank Middle East Limited in 2016 in respect of HSBC Bank A.S. (Turkey).
Key ratios and figures are reflected throughout the Pillar 3 2016 disclosures and are also available on pages 2 to 3 of the Annual Reports and Accounts 2016. Where disclosures have been enhanced or are new we do not generally restate or provide prior year comparatives. The capital resources tables track the position from a CRD IV transitional to an end point basis.
We publish comprehensive Pillar 3 disclosures annually on the HSBC website www.hsbc.com, simultaneously with the release of our Annual Report and Accounts. A Pillar 3 document will also be disclosed at half-year following our Interim Report
 
disclosure. Earnings Releases will include regulatory information complementing the financial and risk information presented there and in line with the new requirements on the frequency of regulatory disclosures.
Pillar 3 requirements may be met by inclusion in other disclosure media. Where we adopt this approach, references are provided to the relevant pages of the Annual Report and Accounts or other location.
We continue to engage constructively in the work of the UK authorities and industry associations to improve the transparency and comparability of UK banks’ Pillar 3 disclosures.
Regulatory developments
Throughout 2016, the BCBS and the Financial Stability Board (‘FSB’) continued to develop their package of reforms to the existing Basel III regulatory capital framework. In particular, the BCBS has proposed modifications to the existing risk-weighted asset (‘RWA’) and leverage frameworks. While many of these proposals are now finalised, certain key elements remain in draft, subject to international agreement. These include:
changes to the framework for credit risk capital requirements under both the internal ratings based (‘IRB’) and standardised (‘STD’) approaches;
a new single operational risk methodology, replacing those currently available;
changes to leverage ratio exposure calculation and a new leverage buffer for global systemically important banks (‘G-SIBs’); and
the introduction of a capital floor based on the new STD approaches.
Separately, in response to the implementation of International Financial Reporting Standards 9 Financial Instruments (‘IFRS 9’) into the accounting framework in 2018, the BCBS has consulted on the long-term treatment of accounting provisions in the regulatory framework and potential transitional arrangements. It is the BCBS’s aim that all of the above proposals will be finalised in 2017.
Meanwhile, in November, the European Commission (‘EC’) proposed a number of revisions to CRD IV, which reflect some of the proposals already completed or under development by the BCBS. Together, these changes are known as the ‘CRR2’ package.
The CRR2 package includes the following:
a new STD approach for counterparty credit risk (‘CCR’) to replace the existing current exposure and STD methods;
changes to the rules for determining the trading book boundary and the methodologies for calculating market risk capital charges;
a binding leverage ratio and changes to the exposure measure;
a new methodology for capital charges for equity investments in funds;
restrictions to the capital base and changes to the exposure limits for the calculation of large exposures; and
the final FSB Total Loss Absorbing Capacity (‘TLAC’) requirements in the EU in the form of Minimum Requirements for own funds and Eligible Liabilities (‘MREL’). In relation to MREL implementation in the UK, the Bank of England also published its final requirements in November 2016, which introduces MREL from 2019 onwards consistent with international timelines.
The CRR2 package is expected to apply from 1 January 2021, save for the rules on TLAC, which may apply from 1 January


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
3


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


2019, and the transitional provisions for IFRS 9, which may apply from 1 January 2018.
All changes to the regulatory framework would need to be transposed into the relevant law before coming into effect.
Risk management
Our risk management framework
We use an enterprise-wide risk management framework across the organisation and across all risk types. It is underpinned by our risk culture and is reinforced by HSBC Values and our Global Standards programme.
The framework fosters continuous monitoring of the risk environment, and an integrated evaluation of risks and their interactions. It also ensures we have a consistent approach to monitoring, managing and mitigating the risks we accept and incur in our activities. Further information on our risk management framework is set out on page 101 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016. The management and mitigation of principal risks facing the Group is described in our top and emerging risks on page 89 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Commentary on hedging strategies and associated processes can be found in the Market Risk and Securitisation sections of this document. Additionally, a comprehensive overview of this topic can be found in Note 16 on page 262 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Risk culture
HSBC has long recognised the importance of a strong risk culture, the fostering of which is a key responsibility of senior executives. Our risk culture is reinforced by HSBC Values and our Global Standards programme. It is instrumental in aligning the behaviours of individuals with our attitude to assuming and managing risk, which helps to ensure that our risk profile remains in line with our risk appetite.
Our risk culture is further reinforced by our approach to remuneration. Individual awards, including those for senior executives, are based on compliance with HSBC Values and the achievement of financial and non-financial objectives that are aligned to our risk appetite and strategy.
Further information on risk and remuneration is set out on page 89 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Risk governance
The Board has ultimate responsibility for the effective management of risk and approves HSBC’s risk appetite. It is advised on risk-related matters by the Group Risk Committee (‘GRC’), the Financial System Vulnerabilities Committee (‘FSVC’) and the Conduct and Values Committee (‘CVC’). The activities of the GRC, FSVC and CVC are set out on pages 176 to 178 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Executive accountability for the monitoring, assessment and management of risk resides with the Group Chief Risk Officer. He is supported by the Risk Management Meeting (‘RMM’) of the Group Management Board (‘GMB’).
The management of financial crime risk resides with the Group Head of Financial Crime Risk. He is supported by the Global Standards Steering Meeting, as described on page 114 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Day-to-day responsibility for risk management is delegated to senior managers with individual accountability for decision making. These managers are supported by global functions as described under ‘Three lines of defence’ (see page 102 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016).
Our executive risk governance structures ensure appropriate oversight and accountability of risk, which facilitates the
 
reporting and escalation to the RMM (see page 101 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016).
Risk appetite
Risk appetite is a key component of our management of risk. It describes the aggregate level and risk types that we are willing to accept in achieving our medium to long-term business objectives. Within HSBC, risk appetite is managed through a global risk appetite framework and articulated in a risk appetite statement (‘RAS’), which is biannually approved by the Board on the advice of the GRC.
The Group‘s risk appetite informs our strategic and financial planning process, defining the desired forward-looking risk profile of the Group. It is also integrated within other risk management tools, such as the top and emerging risks report and stress testing, to ensure consistency in risk management. Information on our risk management tools is set out on page 101 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016. Details on the Group’s overarching risk appetite are set out on page 89 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Stress testing
HSBC operates a comprehensive stress testing programme that supports our risk management and capital planning. It includes execution of stress tests mandated by our regulators. Our stress testing is supported by dedicated teams and infrastructure.
Our testing programme demonstrates our capital strength and enhances our resilience to external shocks. It also helps us understand and mitigate risks, and informs our decision about capital levels. As well as taking part in regulators‘ stress tests, we conduct our own internal stress tests.
The Group stress testing programme is overseen by the GRC, and results are reported, where appropriate, to the RMM and GRC.
Further information on stress testing and details of the Group’s regulatory stress test results are set out on page 103 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Global Risk function
We have a dedicated Global Risk function, headed by the Group Chief Risk Officer, which is responsible for the Group‘s risk management framework. This includes establishing global policy, monitoring risk profiles, and forward-looking risk identification and management. Global Risk is made up of sub-functions covering all risks to our operations. It is independent from the global businesses, including sales and trading functions, helping to ensure balance in risk/return decisions. The Global Risk function operates in line with the ‘three lines of defence’ model (see page 102 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016).
Risk management and internal control systems
The Directors are responsible for maintaining and reviewing the effectiveness of risk management and internal control systems, and for determining the aggregate level and risk types they are willing to accept in achieving the Group’s business objectives. On behalf of the Board, the GAC has responsibility for oversight of risk management and internal controls over financial reporting, and the GRC has responsibility for oversight of risk management and internal controls over other than financial reporting, including enterprise-wide stress testing.
The Directors, through the GRC and the GAC, conduct an annual review of the effectiveness of our system of risk management and internal control. The GRC and the GAC received confirmation that executive management has taken or is taking the necessary actions to remedy any failings or weaknesses identified through the operation of our framework of controls.
HSBC’s key risk management and internal control procedures are described on page 183 of the Annual Report and Accounts


4
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

2016, where the Directors’ Report on the effectiveness of internal controls can also be found.
Risk measurement and reporting systems
Our risk measurement and reporting systems are designed to help ensure that risks are comprehensively captured with all the attributes necessary to support well-founded decisions, that those attributes are accurately assessed and that information is delivered in a timely manner for those risks to be successfully managed and mitigated.
Risk measurement and reporting systems are also subject to a governance framework designed to ensure that their build and implementation are fit for purpose and functioning appropriately. Risk information systems development is a key responsibility of the Global Risk function, while the development and operation of risk rating and management systems and processes are ultimately subject to the oversight of the Board.
We continue to invest significant resources in IT systems and processes in order to maintain and improve our risk management capabilities. A number of key initiatives and projects to enhance consistent data aggregation, reporting and management, and work towards meeting our Basel Committee data obligations are in progress. Group policy promotes the deployment of preferred technology where practicable. Group standards govern the procurement and operation of systems used in our subsidiaries to process risk information within business lines and risk functions.
Risk measurement and reporting structures deployed at Group level are applied throughout global businesses and major operating subsidiaries through a common operating model for integrated risk management and control. This model sets out the respective responsibilities of Group, global business, region and country level risk functions in respect of such matters as risk governance and oversight, compliance risks, approval authorities and lending guidelines, global and local scorecards, management information and reporting, and relations with third parties, including regulators, rating agencies and auditors.
Risk analytics and model governance
The Global Risk function manages a number of analytics disciplines supporting rating and scoring models for different risk types and business segments, economic capital and stress testing. It formulates technical responses to industry developments and regulatory policy in the field of risk analytics, develops HSBC’s global risk models, and oversees local model development and use around the Group in progress toward our implementation targets for the IRB advanced approach.
 
Model governance is under the general oversight of Global Model Oversight Committee (‘MOC’). Global MOC is supported by specific global functional MOCs for wholesale credit risk, market risk, Retail Banking and Wealth Management (‘RBWM’), Global Private Banking (‘GPB’), Finance, regulatory compliance, operational risk, fraud risk and financial intelligence, pensions risk, financial crime risk, and has functional and/or regional and entity-level counterparts with comparable terms of reference.
The Global MOC meets regularly and reports to RMM. It is chaired by the Global Risk function, and its membership is drawn from Risk, Finance and global businesses. Its primary responsibilities are to oversee the framework for the management of model risk, bring a strategic approach to model-related issues across the Group and to oversee the governance of our risk rating models, their consistency and approval, within the regulatory framework. Through its oversight of the functional MOCs, it identifies emerging risks for all aspects of the risk rating system, ensuring that model risk is managed within our risk appetite statement, and formally advises RMM on any material model-related issues.
Models are also subject to an independent model review process led by the Independent Model Review team within Global Risk. The Independent Model Review team provides robust challenge to the modelling approaches used across the Group, and ensures that the performance of those models is transparent and that their limitations are visible to key stakeholders.
The development and use of data and models to meet local requirements are the responsibility of global businesses or functions, as well as regional and/or local entities under the governance of their own management, subject to overall Group policy and oversight.
Linkage to the Annual Report and Accounts
2016
Basis of consolidation
The basis of consolidation for the purpose of financial accounting under IFRSs, described in Note 1 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016, differs from that used for regulatory purposes as described in ‘Structure of the regulatory group’ on page 10.


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
5


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 1: Reconciliation of balance sheets – financial accounting to regulatory scope of consolidation
 
 
Accounting
balance
sheet

Deconsolidation
of insurance/
other entities

Consolidation
of banking
associates

Regulatory
balance
sheet

 
Ref
$m

$m

$m

$m

Assets
 
 
 
 
 
Cash and balances at central banks
 
128,009

(27
)
1,197

129,179

Items in the course of collection from other banks
 
5,003


26

5,029

Hong Kong Government certificates of indebtedness
 
31,228



31,228

Trading assets
 
235,125

(198
)
1

234,928

Financial assets designated at fair value
 
24,756

(24,481
)

275

Derivatives
 
290,872

(145
)
77

290,804

Loans and advances to banks
 
88,126

(1,845
)
922

87,203

Loans and advances to customers
 
861,504

(3,307
)
12,897

871,094

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
impairment allowances on IRB portfolios
h
(5,096
)


(5,096
)
impairment allowances on standardised portfolios
 
(2,754
)

(235
)
(2,989
)
Reverse repurchase agreements – non-trading
 
160,974

344

1,444

162,762

Financial investments
 
436,797

(54,904
)
3,500

385,393

Assets held for sale
 
4,389

(7
)

4,382

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
goodwill and intangible assets
e
1



1

impairment allowances

(250
)


(250
)
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
IRB portfolios
h
(146
)


(146
)
standardised portfolios
 
(104
)


(104
)
Capital invested in insurance and other entities
 

2,214


2,214

Current tax assets
 
1,145

(118
)

1,027

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets
 
59,520

(3,066
)
306

56,760

– of which: retirement benefit assets
i
4,714



4,714

Interests in associates and joint ventures
 
20,029


(4,195
)
15,834

– of which: positive goodwill on acquisition
e
488


(475
)
13

Goodwill and intangible assets
e
21,346

(6,651
)
481

15,176

Deferred tax assets
f
6,163

176

5

6,344

Total assets at 31 Dec 2016
 
2,374,986

(92,015
)
16,661

2,299,632


6
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 1: Reconciliation of balance sheets – financial accounting to regulatory scope of consolidation (continued)
 
 
Accounting
balance
sheet

Deconsolidation
of insurance/
other entities

Consolidation
of banking
associates

Regulatory
balance
sheet

 
Ref
$m

$m

$m

$m

Liabilities and equity
 
 
 
 
 
Hong Kong currency notes in circulation
 
31,228



31,228

Deposits by banks
 
59,939

(50
)
441

60,330

Customer accounts
 
1,272,386

(44
)
14,997

1,287,339

Repurchase agreements – non-trading
 
88,958



88,958

Items in course of transmission to other banks
 
5,977



5,977

Trading liabilities
 
153,691

643

1

154,335

Financial liabilities designated at fair value
 
86,832

(6,012
)

80,820

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
term subordinated debt included in tier 2 capital
n, q
23,172



23,172

preferred securities included in tier 1 capital
m
411



411

Derivatives
 
279,819

193

64

280,076

Debt securities in issue
 
65,915

(3,547
)
662

63,030

Liabilities of disposal groups held for sale
 
2,790



2,790

Current tax liabilities
 
719

(26
)

693

Liabilities under insurance contracts
 
75,273

(75,273
)


Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities
 
41,501

1,810

495

43,806

– of which: retirement benefit liabilities
 
2,681

(2
)
61

2,740

Provisions
 
4,773

(18
)

4,755

– of which: contingent liabilities and contractual commitments
 
299



299

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
credit-related provisions on IRB portfolios
h
267



267

credit-related provisions on standardised portfolios
 
32



32

Deferred tax liabilities
 
1,623

(981
)
1

643

Subordinated liabilities
 
20,984

1


20,985

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
preferred securities included in tier 1 capital
k, m
1,754



1,754

perpetual subordinated debt included in tier 2 capital
o
1,967



1,967

term subordinated debt included in tier 2 capital
n, q
16,685



16,685

Total liabilities at 31 Dec 2016
 
2,192,408

(83,304
)
16,661

2,125,765

Called up share capital
a
10,096



10,096

Share premium account
a, k
12,619



12,619

Other equity instruments
j, k
17,110



17,110

Other reserves
c, g
(1,234
)
1,735


501

Retained earnings
b, c
136,795

(9,442
)

127,353

Total shareholders’ equity

175,386

(7,707
)

167,679

Non-controlling interests
d, l, m, p
7,192

(1,004
)

6,188

– of which: non-cumulative preference shares issued by subsidiaries
   included in tier 1 capital
m
260



260

Total equity at 31 Dec 2016
 
182,578

(8,711
)

173,867

Total liabilities and equity at 31 Dec 2016
 
2,374,986

(92,015
)
16,661

2,299,632

The references (a) – (q) identify balance sheet components that are used in the calculation of regulatory capital on page 13.

HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
7


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 1: Reconciliation of balance sheets – financial accounting to regulatory scope of consolidation (continued)
 
 
Accounting
balance
sheet

Deconsolidation
of insurance/
other entities

Consolidation
of banking
associates

Regulatory
balance
sheet

 
Ref
$m

$m

$m

$m

Assets
 
 
 
 
 
Cash and balances at central banks
 
98,934

(2
)
28,784

127,716

Items in the course of collection from other banks
 
5,768


22

5,790

Hong Kong Government certificates of indebtedness
 
28,410



28,410

Trading assets
 
224,837

340

4,390

229,567

Financial assets designated at fair value
 
23,852

(23,521
)
2,034

2,365

Derivatives
 
288,476

(146
)
495

288,825

Loans and advances to banks
 
90,401

(3,008
)
16,413

103,806

Loans and advances to customers
 
924,454

(7,427
)
120,016

1,037,043

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
impairment allowances on IRB portfolios
h
(6,291
)


(6,291
)
impairment allowances on standardised portfolios
 
(3,263
)

(2,780
)
(6,043
)
Reverse repurchase agreements – non-trading
 
146,255

711

5,935

152,901

Financial investments
 
428,955

(51,684
)
42,732

420,003

Assets held for sale
 
43,900

(4,107
)

39,793

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
goodwill and intangible assets
e
1,680

(219
)

1,461

impairment allowances
 
(1,454
)


(1,454
)
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
IRB portfolios
h
(7
)


(7
)
standardised portfolios
 
(1,447
)


(1,447
)
Capital invested in insurance and other entities
 

2,371


2,371

Current tax assets
 
1,221

(15
)

1,206

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets
 
54,398

(2,539
)
9,692

61,551

– of which: retirement benefit assets
i
5,272



5,272

Interests in associates and joint ventures
 
19,139


(18,571
)
568

– of which: positive goodwill on acquisition
e
593


(579
)
14

Goodwill and intangible assets
e
24,605

(6,068
)
623

19,160

Deferred tax assets
f
6,051

195

518

6,764

Total assets at 31 Dec 2015
 
2,409,656

(94,900
)
213,083

2,527,839


8
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 1: Reconciliation of balance sheets – financial accounting to regulatory scope of consolidation (continued)
 
 
Accounting
balance
sheet

Deconsolidation
of insurance/
other entities

Consolidation
of banking
associates

Regulatory
balance
sheet

 
Ref
$m

$m

$m

$m

Liabilities and equity
 
 
 
 
 
Hong Kong currency notes in circulation
 
28,410



28,410

Deposits by banks
 
54,371

(97
)
50,005

104,279

Customer accounts
 
1,289,586

(119
)
147,522

1,436,989

Repurchase agreements – non-trading
 
80,400



80,400

Items in course of transmission to other banks
 
5,638



5,638

Trading liabilities
 
141,614

(66
)
59

141,607

Financial liabilities designated at fair value
 
66,408

(6,046
)

60,362

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
term subordinated debt included in tier 2 capital
n, q
21,168



21,168

preferred capital securities included in tier 1 capital
m
1,342



1,342

Derivatives
 
281,071

87

508

281,666

Debt securities in issue
 
88,949

(7,885
)
5,065

86,129

Liabilities of disposal groups held for sale
 
36,840

(3,690
)

33,150

Current tax liabilities
 
783

(84
)
409

1,108

Liabilities under insurance contracts
 
69,938

(69,938
)


Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities
 
38,116

2,326

6,669

47,111

– of which: retirement benefit liabilities
 
2,809

(2
)
61

2,868

Provisions
 
5,552

(25
)

5,527

– of which: contingent liabilities and contractual commitments
 
240



240

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
credit-related provisions on IRB portfolios
h
201



201

credit-related provisions on standardised portfolios
 
39



39

Deferred tax liabilities
 
1,760

(868
)
5

897

Subordinated liabilities
 
22,702


2,841

25,543

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
preferred capital securities included in tier 1 capital
k, m
1,929



1,929

perpetual subordinated debt included in tier 2 capital
o
2,368



2,368

term subordinated debt included in tier 2 capital
n, q
18,405



18,405

Total liabilities at 31 Dec 2015
 
2,212,138

(86,405
)
213,083

2,338,816

Called up share capital
a
9,843



9,843

Share premium account
a, k
12,421



12,421

Other equity instruments
j, k
15,112



15,112

Other reserves
c, g
7,143

1,650


8,793

Retained earnings
b, c
143,941

(9,212
)

134,729

Total shareholders’ equity
 
188,460

(7,562
)

180,898

Non-controlling interests
d, l, m, p
9,058

(933
)

8,125

– of which: non-cumulative preference shares issued by subsidiaries
   included in tier 1 capital
m
2,077



2,077

Total equity at 31 Dec 2015
 
197,518

(8,495
)

189,023

Total liabilities and equity at 31 Dec 2015
 
2,409,656

(94,900
)
213,083

2,527,839

The references (a) – (q) identify balance sheet components that are used in the calculation of regulatory capital on page 13.

HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
9


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Structure of the regulatory group
HSBC’s organisation is that of a financial holding company whose major subsidiaries are almost entirely wholly-owned banking entities. A simplified organisation chart showing the difference between the accounting and regulatory consolidation groups is included in Appendix II.
Following a clarification of policy by the PRA, at 30 September 2016 the regulatory treatment of our investment in Bank of Communications Co., Limited (‘BoCom’) changed from proportional consolidation of RWAs to a deduction from capital (subject to regulatory thresholds). The revised regulatory treatment is more consistent with our financial reporting treatment, aligning with the equity method of accounting, and better reflects our relationship with BoCom, including the nature of our obligations and financial commitments. This also results in BoCom no longer being a difference between the financial accounting and regulatory balance sheets in table 1.
Interests in other banking associates are proportionally consolidated for regulatory purposes by including our share of assets, liabilities, profit and loss, and RWAs in accordance with the PRA’s application of EU legislation. As shown in table 2, the principal associate subject to proportional regulatory consolidation at 31 December 2016 is The Saudi British Bank.
 
Subsidiaries engaged in insurance activities are excluded from the regulatory consolidation by excluding assets, liabilities and post-acquisition reserves, leaving the investment of these insurance subsidiaries to be recorded at cost and deducted from common equity tier 1 (‘CET1’) (subject to thresholds). In the column ‘Deconsolidation of insurance/other entities’, in table 1, the amount of $2.2bn (2015: $2.4bn) shown as ‘Capital invested in insurance and other entities’ represents the cost of investment in our insurance business. The principal insurance entities are listed in table 2.
The regulatory consolidation also excludes special purpose entities (‘SPEs’) where significant risk has been transferred to third parties. Exposures to these SPEs are risk-weighted as securitisation positions for regulatory purposes. The deconsolidation of SPEs connected to securitisation activity and other entities mainly impacts the adjustments to ‘Loans and advances to customers’, ‘Financial investments’ and ‘Debt securities in issue’. Table 2 lists the principal SPEs excluded from the regulatory consolidation with their total assets and total equity. Further details of the use of SPEs in the Group’s securitisation activities are shown in Note 19 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016 and on page 268.

Table 2: Principal entities with a different regulatory and accounting scope of consolidation
 
 
 
At 31 Dec 2016
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
Principal activities
Total
assets

Total
equity

Total
assets

Total
equity

 
Footnotes
 
$m

$m

$m

$m

Principal associates
 
 
 
 
 
 
Bank of Communications Co., Limited
1, 2
Banking services
1,165,535

89,364

1,110,088

80,657

The Saudi British Bank
 
Banking services
49,784

8,202

50,189

7,356

Principal insurance entities excluded from the
regulatory consolidation
 
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC Life (International) Ltd
 
Life insurance manufacturing
39,346

2,838

34,808

2,805

HSBC Assurances Vie (France)
 
Life insurance manufacturing
23,418

721

23,713

663

Hang Seng Insurance Company Ltd
 
Life insurance manufacturing
15,225

1,107

14,455

1,154

HSBC Insurance (Singapore) Pte Ltd
 
Life insurance manufacturing
3,589

360

3,102

315

HSBC Life (UK) Ltd
 
Life insurance manufacturing
1,678

158

1,941

390

HSBC Life Insurance Company Ltd
 
Life insurance manufacturing
864

85

764

109

HSBC Seguros S.A. (Mexico)
 
Life insurance manufacturing
716

118

870

182

HSBC Amanah Takaful (Malaysia) SB
 
Life insurance manufacturing
298

26

302

27

HSBC Vida e Previdência (Brasil) S.A.
 
Life insurance manufacturing


3,418

155

HSBC Seguros (Brasil) S.A.
 
Life insurance manufacturing


484

283

Principal SPEs excluded from the
regulatory consolidation
3
 
 
 
 
 
Regency Assets Ltd
 
Securitisation
7,380


15,183


Mazarin Funding Ltd
 
Securitisation
1,117

12

1,879

(9
)
Turquoise Receivables Trustee Ltd
 
Securitisation
838


852

(1
)
Barion Funding Ltd
 
Securitisation
653

56

1,132

68

Malachite Funding Ltd
 
Securitisation
356

34

442

26

Metrix Portfolio Distribution Plc
 
Securitisation
333


304


1
Since 30 September 2016, both the accounting and regulatory balance sheets use the equity method to consolidate our interest in BoCom. For further details, see ‘Structure of the regulatory group’ above.
2
Total assets and total equity for 2016 are as at 30 September 2016.
3
These SPEs issued no or de minimis share capital. The negative equity represents net unrealised losses on unimpaired assets on their balance sheets and negative retained earnings.
Table 2 also presents the total assets and total equity, on a stand-alone IFRS basis, of the entities which are included in the Group consolidation on different bases for accounting and regulatory purposes. The figures shown therefore include intra-Group balances. For associates, table 2 shows the total assets and total equity of the entity as a whole rather than HSBC’s share in the entities’ balance sheets.
For insurance entities, the present value of in-force long-term insurance business asset of $6.5bn and the related deferred tax liability are recognised at the financial reporting consolidated level only, and are therefore not included in the asset or equity positions for the stand-alone entities presented in table 2. In
 
addition, these figures exclude any deferred acquisition cost assets that may be recognised in the entities’ stand-alone financial reporting.
Measurement of regulatory exposures
This section sets out the main reasons why the measurement of regulatory exposures is not directly comparable with the financial information presented in the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
The Pillar 3 Disclosures 2016 are prepared in accordance with regulatory capital adequacy concepts and rules, while the Annual Report and Accounts 2016 are prepared in accordance


10
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

with IFRSs. The purpose of the regulatory balance sheet is to provide a point-in-time (‘PIT’) value of all on-balance sheet assets. The regulatory exposure value includes an estimation of risk, and is expressed as the amount expected to be outstanding if and when the counterparty defaults.
The difference between total assets on the regulatory balance sheet is shown in table 3, and the credit risk and CCR exposure values are shown in table 4.
Moreover, regulatory exposure classes are based on different criteria from accounting asset types and are therefore not comparable on a line by line basis.
 
The following tables show in two steps how the accounting values in the regulatory balance sheet link to regulatory exposure at default (‘EAD’).
In a first step, table 3 below shows a breakdown of the accounting balances into the risk types that form the basis for regulatory capital requirements. Table 4 then shows the main differences between the accounting balances and regulatory exposures by regulatory risk type.

Table 3: Mapping of financial statement categories with regulatory risk categories
 
 
 
Carrying value of items
 
Carrying values as reported in published financial statements

Carrying values under scope of regulatory consolidation1

Subject to credit risk framework

Subject to CCR framework2

Subject to securitisation framework3

Subject to the market risk framework

Subject to deduction from capital or not subject to regulatory capital requirements4

 
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

Assets
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cash and balances at central banks
128.0

129.2

129.2





Items in the course of collection from other banks
5.0

5.0

5.0





Hong Kong Government certificates of indebtedness
31.2

31.2

31.2





Trading assets
235.1

234.9

8.4

11.3


208.7

17.6

Financial assets designated at fair value
24.8

0.3

0.3





Derivatives
290.9

290.8


289.9

0.9

290.8


Loans and advances to banks
88.1

87.2

76.3

2.0

1.2


7.7

Loans and advances to customers
861.5

871.1

847.4

8.9

10.8


4.0

Reverse repurchase agreements – non-trading
161.0

162.8


162.4

0.4



Financial investments
436.8

385.4

375.8


9.5


0.1

Assets held for sale
4.4

4.4

4.4





Capital invested in insurance and other entities
2.2

2.2

1.4




0.8

Current tax assets
1.1

1.0

1.0





Prepayments, accrued income and other assets
59.5

56.8

38.0

3.9


8.2

6.7

Interests in associates and joint ventures
17.8

15.8

10.3




5.5

Goodwill and intangible assets
21.3

15.2





15.2

Deferred tax assets
6.2

6.3

5.2




1.1

Total assets at 31 Dec 2016
2,374.9

2,299.6

1,533.9

478.4

22.8

507.7

58.7

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cash and balances at central banks
98.9

127.7

127.7





Items in the course of collection from other banks
5.8

5.8

5.8





Hong Kong Government certificates of indebtedness
28.4

28.4

28.4





Trading assets
224.8

229.5

4.4

17.4


225.1


Financial assets designated at fair value
23.9

2.4

2.4





Derivatives
288.5

288.8

0.3

287.5

0.9

288.5


Loans and advances to banks
90.4

103.8

103.8





Loans and advances to customers
924.4

1,037.0

1,027.5


9.5



Reverse repurchase agreements – non-trading
146.3

152.9

5.9

147.0

 


Financial investments
429.0

420.0

408.7


11.3



Assets held for sale
43.9

39.8

32.8

5.3



1.7

Capital invested in insurance and other entities
2.4

2.4

2.4





Current tax assets
1.2

1.2

1.2





Prepayments, accrued income and other assets
54.4

61.5

44.9



11.5

5.1

Interests in associates and joint ventures
16.7

0.6





0.6

Goodwill and intangible assets
24.6

19.2





19.2

Deferred tax assets
6.1

6.8

7.8




(1.0
)
Total assets at 31 Dec 2015
2,409.7

2,527.8

1,804.0

457.2

21.7

525.1

25.6

1
The amounts shown in the column ‘Carrying values under scope of regulatory consolidation’ do not equal the sum of the amounts shown in the remaining columns of this table for line items ‘Derivatives’ and ‘Trading assets’, as some of the assets included in these items are subject to regulatory capital charges for both CCR and market risk.
2
The amounts shown in the column ‘Subject to CCR framework’ include both non-trading book and trading book.
3
The amounts shown in the column ‘Subject to securitisation framework’ only include non-trading book. Trading book securitisation positions are included in the market risk column.
4
In the comparative period, the carrying value of settlement accounts not subject to regulatory capital requirements were reported in credit risk and market risk.



HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
11


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 4: Main sources of differences between regulatory exposure values and carrying values in financial statements
 
 
Items subject to:
 
 
Credit risk

CCR

Securitisation

 
Footnotes
$bn

$bn

$bn

Asset carrying value amount under scope of regulatory consolidation
 
1,533.9

478.4

22.8

– differences due to reversal of IFRS netting
 
14.6

110.3


– differences due to financial collateral on standardised approach
 
(12.3
)


– differences due to consideration of provisions on IRB approach
 
6.0



– differences due to modelling and standardised CCFs for credit risk and other differences
1
250.7


12.4

– differences due to credit risk mitigation and potential exposures for counterparty risk
 

(426.4
)

– differences due to free deliveries and sundry balances
 

2.5


Exposure values considered for regulatory purposes at 31 Dec 2016
 
1,792.9

164.8

35.2

 
 
 
 
 
Asset carrying value amount under scope of regulatory consolidation
 
1,804.0

457.2

21.7

– differences due to reversal of IFRS netting
2
31.7

110.0


– differences due to financial collateral on standardised approach
 
(13.8
)


– differences due to consideration of provisions on IRB approach
 
7.2


0.6

– differences due to modelling and standardised CCFs for credit risk and other differences
1
275.8


19.3

– differences due to credit risk mitigation and potential exposures for counterparty risk
 

(395.5
)

– differences due to free deliveries and sundry balances
 

6.9


Exposure values considered for regulatory purposes at 31 Dec 2015
 
2,104.9

178.6

41.6

1
This includes the undrawn portion of committed facilities, various trade finance commitments and guarantees, by applying CCFs to these items.
2
In the comparative period, ‘differences due to reversal of IFRS netting’ have been reallocated from ‘differences due to credit risk mitigation and potential exposures for counterparty risk’.
Explanations of differences between accounting and regulatory exposure amounts
Under IFRS, netting is only permitted if legal right of set-off exists and the cash flows are intended to be settled on a net basis. Under the PRA’s regulatory rules, however, netting is applied for capital calculations if there is legal certainty and the positions are managed on a net collateralised basis. As a consequence, we recognise greater netting under the PRA’s rules, reflecting the close-out provisions that would take effect in the event of default of a counterparty rather than just those transactions that are actually settled net in the normal course of business.
Fair value is defined as the best estimate of the price that would be received to sell an asset or be paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date.
Some fair value adjustments already reflect valuation uncertainty to some degree. These are market data uncertainty, model uncertainty and concentration adjustments.
 
While bid/offer are often commensurate with market price dispersion, these adjustments essentially capture an execution cost and not market uncertainty. However, it is recognised that a variety of valuation techniques combined with the range of plausible market parameters at a given PIT still generate unexpected uncertainty beyond fair value.
A series of additional valuation adjustments (‘AVAs’) are therefore required to reach a specified degree of confidence (the ‘Prudent Value’) set by regulators and that may differ from HSBC’s own quantification for disclosure purposes.
AVAs should consider at the minimum: market price uncertainty, bid offer (close out) uncertainty, model risk, concentration, administrative cost, unearned credit spread and funding fair value adjustment (‘FFVA’).
AVAs are not limited to level 3 exposures, for which a 95% uncertainty range is already computed and disclosed, but must be also calculated for any exposure for which the exit price cannot be determined without a degree of uncertainty.


12
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Capital and RWAs
Capital management
Approach and policy
Our approach to capital management is designed to ensure we meet current regulatory requirements and that we respect the payment priority of our capital providers. We aim to maintain a strong capital base, to support the risks inherent in our business and to invest in accordance with our six filters framework, meeting both consolidated and local regulatory capital requirements at all times.
Our capital management process culminates in the annual Group capital plan, which is approved by the Board. HSBC Holdings is the primary provider of equity capital to its subsidiaries and also provides them with non-equity capital where necessary. These investments are substantially funded by HSBC Holdings’ issuance of equity and non-equity capital and by profit retention. As part of its capital management process, HSBC Holdings seeks to maintain a balance between the composition of its capital and its investment in subsidiaries. Subject to the above, there is no current or foreseen impediment to HSBC Holdings’ ability to provide such investments.
Each subsidiary manages its own capital to support its planned business growth and meet its local regulatory requirements within the context of the Group capital plan. Capital generated by subsidiaries in excess of planned requirements is returned to HSBC Holdings, normally by way of dividends, in accordance with the Group’s capital plan.
During 2016, consistent with the Group’s capital plan, the Group’s subsidiaries did not experience any significant restrictions on paying dividends or repaying loans and
 
advances. Also, there are no foreseen restrictions envisaged with regard to planned dividends or payments. However, the ability of subsidiaries to pay dividends or advance monies to HSBC Holdings depends on, among other things, their respective local regulatory capital and banking requirements, exchange controls, statutory reserves, and financial and operating performance. None of our subsidiaries that are excluded from the regulatory consolidation have capital resources below their minimum regulatory requirement. HSBC Holdings does not have any Group Financial Support Agreements outstanding.
All capital securities included in the capital base of HSBC have been either issued as fully compliant CRD IV securities (on an end point basis) or in accordance with the rules and guidance in the PRA’s previous General Prudential Sourcebook which are included in the capital base by virtue of application of the CRD IV grandfathering provisions. The main features of capital securities issued by the Group, categorised as tier 1
(‘T1 capital’) and tier 2 capital (‘T2 capital’), are set out on the HSBC website, www.hsbc.com.
The values disclosed are the IFRSs balance sheet carrying amounts, not the amounts that these securities contribute to regulatory capital. For example, the IFRSs accounting and the regulatory treatments differ in their approaches to issuance costs, regulatory amortisation and regulatory eligibility limits prescribed in the grand-fathering provisions under CRD IV.
A list of the features of our capital instruments in accordance with annex III of Commission Implementing Regulation 1423/2013 is also published on our website with reference to our balance sheet on 31 December 2016. This is in addition to the full terms and conditions of our securities, also available on our website.
For further details of our approach to capital management, please see page 165 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.



Own funds
Table 5: Own funds disclosure
 
 
 
At
31 Dec
2016

CRD IV
prescribed
residual
amount

Final
CRD IV
text

Ref*
 
Ref†
$m

$m

$m

 
Common equity tier 1 (‘CET1’) capital: instruments and reserves
 
 
 
 
1
Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts
 
21,310

 
21,310

 
– ordinary shares
a
21,310

 
21,310

2
Retained earnings
b
125,442

 
125,442

3
Accumulated other comprehensive income (and other reserves)
c
560

 
560

5
Minority interests (amount allowed in consolidated CET1)
d
3,878

 
3,878

5a
Independently reviewed interim net profits net of any foreseeable charge or dividend
b
(1,899
)
 
(1,899
)
6
Common equity tier 1 capital before regulatory adjustments
 
149,291

 
149,291

 
Common equity tier 1 capital: regulatory adjustments
 
 
 
 
7
Additional value adjustments
 
(1,358
)
 
(1,358
)
8
Intangible assets (net of related deferred tax liability)
e
(15,037
)
 
(15,037
)
10
Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability excluding those arising from temporary differences (net of related tax liability)
f
(1,696
)
 
(1,696
)
11
Fair value reserves related to gains or losses on cash flow hedges
g
(52
)
 
(52
)
12
Negative amounts resulting from the calculation of expected loss amounts
h
(4,025
)
 
(4,025
)
14
Gains or losses on liabilities valued at fair value resulting from changes in own credit standing

1,052

 
1,052

15
Defined-benefit pension fund assets
i
(3,680
)
 
(3,680
)
16
Direct and indirect holdings of own CET1 instruments

(1,573
)
 
(1,573
)
19
Direct, indirect and synthetic holdings by the institution of the CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment in those entities (amount above 10% threshold and net of eligible short positions)
 
(6,370
)
 
(6,370
)
22
Amount exceeding the 15%/17.65% threshold
 

(568
)
(568
)
23
– direct and indirect holdings by the institution of the CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment in those entities
 

(388
)
(388
)

HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
13


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 5: Own funds disclosure (continued)
 
 
 
At
31 Dec
2016

CRD IV
prescribed
residual
amount

Final
CRD IV
text

Ref*
 
Ref†
$m

$m

$m

25
– deferred tax assets arising from temporary differences
 

(180
)
(180
)
28
Total regulatory adjustments to Common equity tier 1
 
(32,739
)
(568
)
(33,307
)
29
Common equity tier 1 capital
 
116,552

(568
)
115,984

 
Additional tier 1 (‘AT1’) capital: instruments
 
 
 
 
30
Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts
 
11,259



11,259

31
– classified as equity under IFRSs
j
11,259



11,259

33
Amount of qualifying items and the related share premium accounts subject to phase out
from AT1
k
7,946

(7,946
)

34
Qualifying tier 1 capital included in consolidated AT1 capital (including minority interests not included in CET1) issued by subsidiaries and held by third parties
l, m
2,419

(2,267
)
152

35
– of which: instruments issued by subsidiaries subject to phase out
m
1,522

(1,522
)

36
Additional tier 1 capital before regulatory adjustments
 
21,624

(10,213
)
11,411

 
Additional tier 1 capital: regulatory adjustments
 
 
 
 
37
Direct and indirect holdings of own AT1 instruments
 
(60
)
 
(60
)
41b
Residual amounts deducted from AT1 capital with regard to deduction from tier 2 (‘T2’) capital during the transitional period
 
(94
)
94


 
– direct and indirect holdings by the institution of the T2 instruments and subordinated loans of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment in those entities
 
(94
)
94


43
Total regulatory adjustments to additional tier 1 capital
 
(154
)
94

(60
)
44
Additional tier 1 capital
 
21,470

(10,119
)
11,351

45
Tier 1 capital (T1 = CET1 + AT1)
 
138,022

(10,687
)
127,335

 
Tier 2 capital: instruments and provisions
 
 
 
 
46
Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts
n
16,732

 
16,732

47
Amount of qualifying items and the related share premium accounts subject to phase out
from T2
o
5,695

(5,695
)

48
Qualifying own funds instruments included in consolidated T2 capital (including minority interests and AT1 instruments not included in CET1 or AT1) issued by subsidiaries and held by third parties
p, q
12,323

(12,258
)
65

49
– of which: instruments issued by subsidiaries subject to phase out
q
12,283

(12,283
)

51
Tier 2 capital before regulatory adjustments
 
34,750

(17,953
)
16,797

 
Tier 2 capital: regulatory adjustments
 
 
 
 
52
Direct and indirect holdings of own T2 instruments
 
(40
)
 
(40
)
55
Direct and indirect holdings by the institution of the T2 instruments and subordinated loans of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment in those entities (net of eligible short positions)
 
(374
)
(94
)
(468
)
57
Total regulatory adjustments to tier 2 capital
 
(414
)
(94
)
(508
)
58
Tier 2 capital
 
34,336

(18,047
)
16,289

59
Total capital (TC = T1 + T2)
 
172,358

(28,734
)
143,624

59a
Risk-weighted assets in respect of amounts subject to pre-capital requirements regulation treatment and transitional treatments subject to phase out as prescribed in Regulation (EU) No 575/2013
 
1,419

(1,419
)

 
– items not deducted from CET1: direct and indirect holdings by the institution of the CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment in those entities
 
971

(971
)

 
– items not deducted from CET1: deferred tax assets arising from temporary differences
 
448

(448
)

60
Total risk-weighted assets
 
857,181

(1,419
)
855,762

 
Capital ratios and buffers
 
 
 
 
61
Common equity tier 1
 
13.6
%
 
13.6
%
62
Tier 1
 
16.1
%
 
14.9
%
63
Total capital
 
20.1
%
 
16.8
%
64
Institution specific buffer requirement
 
1.348
%
 
 
65
– capital conservation buffer requirement
 
0.625
%
 
 
66
– counter cyclical buffer requirement
 
0.098
%
 
 
67a
– Global Systemically Important Institution (‘G-SII’) buffer
 
0.625
%
 
 
68
Common equity tier 1 available to meet buffers
 
7.7
%
 
 
 
Amounts below the threshold for deduction (before risk weighting)
 
 
 
 
72
Direct and indirect holdings of the capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment in those entities (amount below 10% threshold and net of eligible short positions)
 
3,056

 
 
73
Direct and indirect holdings by the institution of the CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment in those entities (amount below 10% threshold and net of eligible short positions)
 
12,292

 
 
75
Deferred tax assets arising from temporary differences (amount below 10% threshold, net of related tax liability)
 
5,675

 
 

14
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 5: Own funds disclosure (continued)
 
 
 
At
31 Dec
2016

CRD IV
prescribed
residual
amount

Final
CRD IV
text

Ref*
 
Ref†
$m

$m

$m

 
Applicable caps on the inclusion of provisions in tier 2
 
 
 
 
77
Cap on inclusion of credit risk adjustments in T2 under standardised approach
 
2,109

 
 
79
Cap for inclusion of credit risk adjustments in T2 under internal ratings-based approach
 
3,090

 
 
 
Capital instruments subject to phase-out arrangements (only applicable between
1 Jan 2013 and 1 Jan 2022)
 
 
 
 
82
Current cap on AT1 instruments subject to phase out arrangements
 
10,382

 
 
83
Amount excluded from AT1 due to cap (excess over cap after redemptions and maturities)
 
202

 
 
84
Current cap on T2 instruments subject to phase out arrangements
 
17,978

 
 
85
Amount excluded from T2 due to cap (excess over cap after redemptions and maturities)
 
3,712

 
 
*
The references identify the lines prescribed in the European Banking Authority (‘EBA’) template. Lines represented in this table are those lines which are applicable and where there is a value.
The references (a) – (q) identify balance sheet components on page 6 which are used in the calculation of regulatory capital.
Leverage ratio
Our leverage ratio calculated on the Capital Requirements Regulation basis was 5.4% at 31 December 2016, up from 5.0% at 31 December 2015. This was mainly due to a reduction in the exposure measure resulting from the change in regulatory treatment of our investment in BoCom.
The Group’s UK leverage ratio on a modified basis, excluding qualifying central bank balances, was 5.7%. This modification to the leverage ratio exposure measure was made following recommendations by the Bank of England’s Financial Policy Committee (‘FPC’).
The FPC has stated that it intends to recalibrate the leverage ratio in 2017 to take account of this modification. Any uplift in HSBC’s UK leverage ratio should be considered in this context.
At 31 December 2016, our UK minimum leverage ratio requirement of 3% was supplemented by an additional
 
leverage ratio buffer of 0.2% that translates to a value of $5bn, and a countercyclical leverage ratio buffer which results in no capital impact. We comfortably exceeded these leverage requirements.
The risk of excessive leverage is managed as part of HSBC’s global risk appetite framework and monitored using a leverage ratio metric within our RAS. The RAS articulates the aggregate level and types of risk that HSBC is willing to accept in its business activities in order to achieve its strategic business objectives. The RAS is monitored via the risk appetite profile report, which includes comparisons of actual performance against the risk appetite and tolerance thresholds assigned to each metric, to ensure that any excessive risk is highlighted, assessed and mitigated appropriately. The risk appetite profile report is presented monthly to the RMM and the GRC. Our approach to risk appetite is described on page 89 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.

Table 6: Summary reconciliation of accounting assets and leverage ratio exposures
 
 
 
At 31 Dec
 
 
2016

2015

Ref*
 
$bn

$bn

1
Total assets as per published financial statements
2,375.0

2,409.7

 
Adjustments for:
 
 
2
– entities which are consolidated for accounting purposes but are outside the scope of regulatory consolidation
(75.4
)
112.4

4
– derivative financial instruments
(158.6
)
(140.8
)
5
– securities financing transactions (‘SFT’)
10.1

13.4

6
– off-balance sheet items (i.e. conversion to credit equivalent amounts of off-balance sheet exposures)
223.1

400.9

7
– other
(19.8
)
(1.2
)
8
Total leverage ratio exposure
2,354.4

2,794.4

*
The references identify the lines prescribed in the EBA template. Lines represented in this table are those lines which are applicable and where there is a value.

HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
15


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 7: Leverage ratio common disclosure
 
 
 
At 31 Dec
 
 
2016

2015

Ref*
 
$bn

$bn

 
On-balance sheet exposures (excluding derivatives and SFT)
 
 
1
On-balance sheet items (excluding derivatives, SFTs and fiduciary assets, but including collateral)
1,844.4

2,103.5

2
(Asset amounts deducted in determining tier 1 capital)
(34.4
)
(32.8
)
3
Total on-balance sheet exposures (excluding derivatives, SFTs and fiduciary assets)
1,810.0

2,070.7

 
Derivative exposures
 
 
4
Replacement cost associated with all derivatives transactions (i.e. net of eligible cash variation margin)
43.7

31.0

5
Add-on amounts for potential future exposure (‘PFE’) associated with all derivatives transactions (mark-to-market method)
110.2

124.5

6
Gross-up for derivatives collateral provided where deducted from the balance sheet assets pursuant to IFRSs
5.9

4.2

7
(Deductions of receivables assets for cash variation margin provided in derivatives transactions)
(30.6
)
(30.5
)
8
(Exempted central counterparty (‘CCP’) leg of client-cleared trade exposures)
(4.1
)

9
Adjusted effective notional amount of written credit derivatives
216.4

226.1

10
(Adjusted effective notional offsets and add-on deductions for written credit derivatives)
(209.3
)
(205.9
)
11
Total derivative exposures
132.2

149.4

 
Securities financing transaction exposures
 
 
12
Gross SFT assets (with no recognition of netting), after adjusting for sales accounting transactions
266.6

243.0

13
(Netted amounts of cash payables and cash receivables of gross SFT assets)
(87.9
)
(77.9
)
14
Counterparty credit risk exposure for SFT assets
10.4

8.3

16
Total securities financing transaction exposures
189.1

173.4

 
Other off-balance sheet exposures
 
 
17
Off-balance sheet exposures at gross notional amount
757.7

906.0

18
(Adjustments for conversion to credit equivalent amounts)
(534.6
)
(505.1
)
19
Total off-balance sheet exposures
223.1

400.9

 
Capital and total exposures
 
 
20
Tier 1 capital
127.3

140.2

21
Total leverage ratio exposure
2,354.4

2,794.4

22
Leverage ratio
5.4
%
5.0
%
EU-23
Choice on transitional arrangements for the definition of the capital measure
Fully Phased In

Fully Phased in

*
The references identify the lines prescribed in the EBA template. Lines represented in this table are those lines which are applicable and where there is a value.
Table 8: Leverage ratio – Split of on-balance sheet exposures (excluding derivatives, SFTs and exempted exposures)
 
 
 
At 31 Dec
 
 
2016

2015

Ref*
 
$bn

$bn

EU-1
Total on-balance sheet exposures (excluding derivatives, SFTs, and exempted exposures)
1,844.4

2,103.5

EU-2
trading book exposures
267.5

224.5

EU-3
banking book exposures
1,576.9

1,879.0

 
– of which:
 
 
EU-4
covered bonds
1.1

1.0

EU-5
exposures treated as sovereigns
504.4

521.0

EU-6
exposures to regional governments, multilateral development banks (‘MDB’), international organisations and public sector entities (‘PSE’) not treated as sovereigns
6.0

1.0

EU-7
institutions
67.6

129.0

EU-8
secured by mortgages of immovable properties
254.6

292.0

EU-9
retail exposures
84.6

113.0

EU-10
corporate
532.4

677.0

EU-11
exposures in default
12.4

15.0

EU-12
other exposures (e.g. equity, securitisations and other non-credit obligation assets)
113.8

130.0

*
The references identify the lines prescribed in the EBA template. Lines represented in this table are those lines which are applicable and where there is a value.

Capital buffers
The geographical breakdown and institution specific countercyclical capital buffer (‘CCyB’) disclosure is published annually on the HSBC website, www.hsbc.com.
 
Our G-SIB Indicator disclosure is published annually on the HSBC website, www.hsbc.com.



16
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Pillar 1 capital requirements and RWA flow
Pillar 1 covers the capital resources requirements for credit risk, counterparty credit risk, equity, securitisation, market risk and
 
operational risk. These requirements are expressed in terms of RWAs.

 
Risk category
Scope of permissible approaches
Approach adopted by HSBC
 
Credit risk
The Basel Committee framework applies three approaches of increasing sophistication to the calculation of Pillar 1 credit risk capital requirements. The most basic level, the standardised approach, requires banks to use external credit ratings to determine the risk weightings applied to rated counterparties. Other counterparties are grouped into broad categories and standardised risk weightings are applied to these categories. The next level, the IRB foundation approach, allows banks to calculate their credit risk capital requirements on the basis of their internal assessment of a counterparty’s Probability of Default (‘PD’), but subjects their quantified estimates of EAD and Loss Given Default (‘LGD’) to standard supervisory parameters. Finally, the IRB advanced approach allows banks to use their own internal assessment in both determining PD and quantifying EAD and LGD.
For consolidated Group reporting, we have adopted the advanced IRB approach for the majority of our business.
Some portfolios remain on the standardised or foundation IRB approaches:
pending the issuance of local regulations or model approval;
following supervisory prescription of a non-advanced approach; or
under exemptions from IRB treatment.
 
 
 
 
 
Counterparty credit risk
Three approaches to calculating CCR and determining exposure values are defined by the Basel Committee: mark-to-market, standardised and Internal Model Method (‘IMM’). These exposure values are used to determine capital requirements under one of the credit risk approaches; standardised, IRB foundation or IRB advanced.
We use the mark-to-market and IMM approaches for CCR. Details of the IMM permission we have received from the PRA can be found in the Financial Services Register on the PRA website. Our aim is to increase the proportion of positions on IMM over time.
 
Equity
For non-trading book, equity exposures can be assessed under standardised or IRB approaches.
For Group reporting purposes all equity exposures are treated under the standardised approach.
 
Securitisation
Basel specifies two methods for calculating credit risk requirements for securitisation positions in the non-trading book: the standardised approach and the IRB approach, which incorporates the Ratings Based Method (‘RBM’), the Internal Assessment Approach (‘IAA’) and the Supervisory Formula Method (‘SFM’).
For the majority of the non-trading book securitisation positions we use the IRB approach, and within this principally the RBM, with lesser amounts on the IAA and the SFM. We also use the standardised approach for an immaterial amount of non-trading book positions. Securitisation positions in the trading book are treated within the market risk framework, using the CRD IV standard rules.
 
Market risk
Market risk capital requirements can be determined under either the standard rules or the Internal Models Approach (‘IMA’). The latter involves the use of internal Value at Risk (‘VaR’) models to measure market risks and determine the appropriate capital requirement.
In addition to the VaR models, other internal models include Stressed VaR, Incremental Risk Charge (‘IRC’) and Comprehensive Risk Measure.

The market risk capital requirement is measured using internal market risk models, where approved by the PRA, or under the standard rules. Our internal market risk models comprise VaR, stressed VaR and IRC. Non-proprietary details of the scope of our IMA permission are available in the Financial Services Register on the PRA website. We are in compliance with the requirements set out in Articles 104 and 105 of the Capital Requirements Regulation.
 
Operational risk
The Basel Committee allows for firms to calculate their operational risk capital requirement under the basic indicator approach, the standardised approach or the advanced measurement approach.
We have historically adopted and currently use the standardised approach in determining our operational risk capital requirement.
We have in place an operational risk model which is used for economic capital calculation purposes.

HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
17


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 9: Total RWAs by risk type
 
RWAs

Capital required1

 
$bn

$bn

Credit risk
655.7

52.5

Standardised approach
166.3

13.3

IRB foundation approach
25.9

2.1

IRB advanced approach
463.5

37.1

Counterparty credit risk
62.0

5.0

Standardised approach
15.0

1.2

– CCR standardised approach
2.8

0.2

– credit valuation adjustment
10.9

0.9

– central counterparty
1.3

0.1

Advanced approach
47.0

3.8

– CCR IRB approach
43.5

3.5

– credit valuation adjustment
3.5

0.3

Market risk
41.5

3.3

Internal model based
36.5

3.0

– VaR
8.7

0.7

– stressed VaR
15.8

1.3

– incremental risk charge
9.5

0.8

– other VaR and stressed VaR
2.5

0.2

Standardised approach
5.0

0.3

– interest rate positions risk
1.5

0.1

– foreign exchange position risk
0.3


– equity position risk
1.7

0.1

– commodity position risk


– securitisation
1.5

0.1

– options


Operational risk
98.0

7.8

At 31 Dec 2016
857.2

68.6

1
‘Capital required’ here and in all tables where the term is used, represents the Pillar 1 capital charge at 8% of RWAs.
Table 10: Overview of RWAs
 
 
 
a
b
c
 
 
 
2016

2015

2016

 
 
 
RWA

RWA

Capital
required

 
 
Footnote
$bn

$bn

$bn

1
Credit risk (excluding counterparty credit risk)
 
589.1

818.7

47.1

2
Standardised approach (‘SA’)
 
120.6

303.9

9.6

3
Internal rating-based (‘IRB’) approach
 
468.5

514.8

37.5

4
Counterparty credit risk
 
61.8

69.1

5.0

5
Standardised approach for counterparty credit risk (‘SA-CCR’)
1
47.4

55.0

3.8

6
Internal model method (‘IMM’)
 
14.4

14.1

1.2

11
Settlement risk
 
0.2

0.1


12
Securitisation exposures in non-trading book
 
21.8

29.1

1.8

13
IRB ratings-based approach (‘RBA’)
 
20.7

28.2

1.7

14
IRB Supervisory Formula Approach (‘SFA’)
 
0.2

0.2


15
SA/simplified supervisory formula approach (‘SSFA’)
 
0.9

0.7

0.1

16
Market risk
 
41.5

42.5

3.3

17
Standardised approach (‘SA’)
 
5.0

7.6

0.4

18
Internal model approaches (‘IMA’)
 
36.5

34.9

2.9

19
Operational risk
 
98.0

115.4

7.8

21
Standardised Approach
 
98.0

115.4

7.8

23
Amounts below the thresholds for deduction (subject to 250% risk weight)
 
44.8

28.1

3.6

24
Floor adjustment
 



25
Total
 
857.2

1,103.0

68.6

1
Prior to the implementation of SA-CCR, this row represents the RWA under the mark-to-market method.



18
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Credit Risk, including amounts below the thresholds for deduction
During the financial year RWAs decreased by $212.9bn, of which $38.1bn was due to foreign currency translation differences. The main drivers of these reductions were the change of regulatory treatment of our investment in BoCom, which has reduced credit risk RWAs by $136.0bn and increased our significant investments subject to 250% risk weight by $24.3bn. In addition, the sale of our operations in Brazil and continued reductions in US run-off portfolios reduced RWAs by $36.9bn and $23.2bn, respectively.
Counterparty credit risk
Overall counterparty credit risk RWAs reduced by $7.3bn, due to reductions from RWA initiatives of $17.3bn offset by increases of $10.0bn, which were predominantly due to trading activity in the first half of the year and the impact of negative interest rates and exchange rate movements. RWA initiatives comprised various trade actions including portfolio compression and trade novation to central counterparties $7.3bn, the implementation of a new internal model to reflect the current interest rate environment $3.8bn, various other process and data refinements $3.8bn, and the disposal of our operations in Brazil $2.4bn.
 
Securitisation in non-trading book
The $7.3bn RWA reduction arises predominantly from disposals of investments in traditional securitisations.
Market risk
Overall market risk RWAs fell by $1.0bn in the year, comprised of a $2.6bn decrease related to the standardised approach offset by a $1.6bn increase under internal models.
The reduction in RWAs related to the standardised approach was driven by a $2.1bn saving through a reduction in legacy positions held in CoCo and securitisation bonds and a $0.5bn reduction due to the disposal of our operations in Brazil. Under internal models, movements in risk levels led to an increase of $5.3bn, primarily driven by increases in the VaR and sVaR due to position changes following the modelling impact of external market risk parameters (predominantly in interest rate risk). Offsetting this increase, was a reduction of $3.7bn due to RWA initiatives, described in more detail under table 13.
Operational risk
During the year, operational risk reduced by $17.4bn mainly due to the change in regulatory treatment of BoCom $10.0bn and the three-year income averaging effect.

Table 11: RWA flow statements of credit risk exposures under IRB
 
 
a
 
 
RWA

 
 
$bn

1
At 31 Dec 2015
514.8

2
Asset size
30.7

3
Asset quality
14.0

4
Model updates
(0.9
)
5
Methodology and policy
0.5

6
Acquisitions and disposals

7
Foreign exchange movements
(28.7
)
10
RWA initiatives
(61.9
)
8
Other

9
At 31 Dec 2016
468.5

RWAs decreased in 2016 by $46.3bn, of which $28.7bn was due to foreign currency translation differences.
RWA initiatives
The main drivers of these reductions were:
$29.8bn as a result of reduced exposures, refined calculations and process improvements;
 
$23.2bn through the continued reduction in US run-off portfolios; and
$9.0bn from the sale of our activities in Brazil.
Asset size
Asset size movements increased RWAs by $30.7bn, principally as a result of a corporate book growth in Europe and Asia.

Table 12: RWA flow statements of CCR exposures under IMM
 
 
a
 
 
RWA

 
 
$bn

1
At 31 Dec 2015
14.1

2
Asset size
3.7

3
Asset quality
0.2

4
Model updates

5
Methodology and policy

 
– internal updates

 
– external regulatory updates

6
Acquisitions and disposals

7
Foreign exchange movements

10
RWA initiatives
(3.6
)
8
Other

9
At 31 Dec 2016
14.4

Modelled counterparty credit risk RWAs increased by $0.3bn over the year.

HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
19


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


RWA initiatives
Reviews of the client portfolio and the renegotiation of Credit Support Annex (‘CSA’) terms led to savings of $3.6bn with an additional $1.1bn of savings due to calculation improvements.
 
These were broadly offset by a $1.1bn increase following the PRA approval and subsequent implementation of a new IMM model (this resulted in a net saving of $3.8bn across both the IMM and standardised approach portfolios).

Table 13: RWA flow statements of market risk exposures under an IMA
 
 
a
b
c
e
f
 
 
VaR

Stressed VaR

IRC

Other

Total RWA1

 
 
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1
At 31 Dec 2015
8.6

12.8

11.4

2.1

34.9

2
Movement in risk levels
2.4

2.9

(0.5
)
0.5

5.3

3
Model updates/changes





4
Methodology and policy





5
Acquisitions and disposals





6
Foreign exchange movements





9
RWA initiatives
(2.3
)

(1.4
)

(3.7
)
7
Other





8
At 31 Dec 2016
8.7

15.7

9.5

2.6

36.5

1
Internal model based RWAs as defined under CRD IV, including those undertakings which are outside the scope of line by line consolidation.
Market risk RWAs arising from internal models increased by $1.6bn over the year, mainly coming from the modelling impact of external market risk parameter changes leading to additional capital requirements as described above.
RWA Initiatives
Savings of $3.7bn of RWAs were partly due to the active risk management of the overall IRC position within Global Markets, creating savings of $1.5bn. Various changes to models comprised the remaining RWA initiatives, post the relevant PRA approvals, which included: the inclusion of the equity skew risk within VaR models and the removal of the corresponding risk not in VaR; the incorporation of the currency of collateral within risk pricing; and the refinement of risk model calculations for FX options and deal contingent swaps.
Pillar 2 and ICAAP
Pillar 2
We conduct an Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (‘ICAAP’) to determine a forward-looking assessment of our capital requirements given our business strategy, risk profile, risk appetite and capital plan. This process incorporates the Group’s risk management processes and governance framework. Our base capital plan undergoes stress testing. This coupled with our economic capital framework and other risk management practices is used to assess our internal capital adequacy requirements and inform our view of our internal capital planning buffer. The ICAAP is formally approved by the Board, which has the ultimate responsibility for the effective management of risk and approval of HSBC’s risk appetite.
The ICAAP is reviewed by the PRA and by a college of EEA supervisors, as part of the Joint Risk Assessment and Decision process, during the supervisory review and evaluation process. This process occurs periodically to enable the regulator to define the Individual Capital Guidance (‘ICG’) or minimum capital requirements for HSBC, and the PRA to define the PRA buffer, where required. Under the revised Pillar 2 PRA regime, which came into effect from 1 January 2016, the capital planning buffer has been replaced with a PRA buffer. This is not intended to duplicate the CRD IV buffers and, where necessary, will be set according to vulnerability in a stress scenario, as assessed through the annual PRA stress testing exercise.
The processes of internal capital adequacy assessment and supervisory review lead to a final determination by the PRA of the ICG and any PRA buffer that may be required.
Within Pillar 2, Pillar 2A considers, in addition to the minimum capital requirements for Pillar 1 risks described above, any supplementary requirements for those risks and any
 
requirements for risk categories not captured by Pillar 1. The risk categories to be covered under Pillar 2A depend on the specific circumstances of a firm and the nature and scale of its business.
Pillar 2B consists of guidance from the PRA on the capital buffer a firm would require in order to remain above its ICG in adverse circumstances that may be largely outside the firm’s normal and direct control; for example, during a period of severe but plausible downturn stress, when asset values and the firm’s capital surplus may become strained. This is quantified via any PRA buffer requirement the PRA may consider necessary. The assessment of this is informed by stress tests and a rounded judgement of a firm’s business model, also taking into account the PRA’s view of a firm’s options and capacity to protect its capital position under stress; for instance, through capital generation. Where the PRA assesses a firm’s risk management and governance to be significantly weak, it may also increase the PRA buffer to cover the risks posed by those weaknesses until they are addressed. The PRA buffer is intended to be drawn upon in times of stress, and its use is not of itself a breach of capital requirements that would trigger automatic restrictions on distributions. In specific circumstances, the PRA should agree a plan with a firm for its restoration over an agreed timescale.
Internal capital adequacy assessment
The Board manages the Group ICAAP, and together with RMM and GRC, it examines the Group’s risk profile from both regulatory and economic capital viewpoints, aiming to ensure that capital resources:
remain sufficient to support our risk profile and outstanding commitments;
meet current regulatory requirements, and that HSBC is well placed to meet those expected in the future;
allow the bank to remain adequately capitalised in the event of a severe economic downturn stress scenario; and
remain consistent with our strategic and operational goals, and our shareholder and investor expectations.
The minimum regulatory capital that we are required to hold is determined by the rules and guidance established by the PRA for the consolidated Group and by local regulators for individual Group companies. These capital requirements are a primary influence shaping the business planning process, in which RWA targets are established for our global businesses in accordance with the Group’s strategic direction and risk appetite.
Economic capital is the internally calculated capital requirement that we deem necessary to support the risks to which we are exposed. The economic capital assessment is a more risk-


20
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

sensitive measure than the regulatory minimum, and takes account of the substantial diversification of risk accruing from our operations. Both the regulatory and the economic capital assessments rely upon the use of models that are integrated into our management of risk. Our economic capital models are calibrated to quantify the level of capital that is sufficient to absorb potential losses over a one-year time horizon to a 99.95% level of confidence for our banking and trading activities, and to a 99.5% level of confidence for our insurance activities and pension risks.
The ICAAP and its constituent economic capital calculations are examined by the PRA as part of its supervisory review and evaluation process. This examination informs the regulator’s view of our Pillar 2 capital requirements.
Preserving our strong capital position remains a priority, and the level of integration of our risk and capital management helps to optimise our response to business demand for regulatory and economic capital. Risks that are explicitly assessed through economic capital are credit risk, including CCR, market and operational risk, interest rate risk in the banking book, insurance risk, pension risk, residual risk and structural foreign exchange risk.
Credit risk
Overview and responsibilities
Credit risk represents our largest regulatory capital requirement.
The principal objectives of our credit risk management function are:
to maintain across HSBC a strong culture of responsible lending and a robust credit risk policy and control framework;
to both partner and challenge our businesses in defining, implementing and continually re-evaluating our credit risk appetite under actual and stress scenario conditions; and
to ensure there is independent, expert scrutiny of credit risks, their costs and their mitigation.
The credit risk functions within Wholesale Credit and Market Risk and RBWM are the constituent parts of Global Risk that support the Group Chief Risk Officer in overseeing credit risks. Their major duties comprise undertaking independent reviews of large and high-risk credit proposals, overseeing large exposure policy and reporting on our wholesale and retail credit risk management disciplines, owning our credit policy and credit systems programmes, overseeing portfolio management and reporting on risk matters to senior executive management and to regulators.
These credit risk functions work closely with other parts of Global Risk; for example, with Operational Risk on the internal control framework and with Risk Strategy on the risk appetite process. In addition, they work jointly with Risk Strategy and Global Finance on stress testing.
The credit responsibilities of Global Risk are described on page 102 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Group-wide, the credit risk functions comprise a network of credit risk management offices reporting within regional risk functions. They fulfil an essential role as independent risk control units distinct from business line management in providing objective scrutiny of risk rating assessments, credit proposals for approval and other risk matters.
Credit risk operates through a hierarchy of personal credit limit approval authorities. Operating company chief executives, acting under authorities delegated by their boards and Group standards, are accountable for credit risk and other risks in their business. In turn, chief executives delegate authority to operating company chief risk officers and management teams on an individual basis. Each operating company is responsible for the quality and performance of its credit portfolios in
 
accordance with Group standards. Above these thresholds of delegated personal credit limited approval authorities, approval must be sought from the regional and, as appropriate, global credit risk function.
Risk proposals in certain portfolios – sovereign obligors, banks, some non-bank financial institutions and intra-Group exposures – are approved centrally in Global Risk to facilitate efficient control and the reporting of regulatory large and cross-border exposures.
Credit risk management
Our exposure to credit risk arises from a wide range of customer and product types, and the risk rating systems in place to measure and monitor these risks are correspondingly diverse. Senior management receives a variety of reports on our credit risk exposures including loan impairments, total exposures and RWAs, as well as updates on specific portfolios that are considered to have heightened credit risk.
Credit risk exposures are generally measured and managed in portfolios of either customer types or product categories. Risk rating systems are designed to assess the default propensity of, and loss severity associated with, distinct customers who are typically managed as individual relationships or, in the case of retail business exposures, on a product portfolio basis.
Risk rating systems for retail exposures are generally quantitative in nature, applying techniques such as behavioural analysis across product portfolios comprising large numbers of homogeneous transactions. Rating systems for individually managed relationships typically use customer financial statements and market data analysis, but also qualitative elements and a final subjective overlay to better reflect any idiosyncratic elements of the customer’s risk profile. See ‘Application of the IRB Approach’ on page 37 .
A fundamental principle of our policy and approach is that analytical risk rating systems and scorecards are all valuable tools at the disposal of management.
The credit process provides for at least an annual review of facility limits granted. Review may be more frequent, as required by circumstances such as the emergence of adverse risk factors.
We constantly seek to improve the quality of our risk management. For central management and reporting purposes, Group IT systems to process credit risk data continue to be enhanced in order to deliver both comprehensive management information in support of business strategy and solutions to evolving regulatory reporting requirements.
Group standards govern the process through which risk rating systems are initially developed, judged fit for purpose, approved and implemented. They also govern the conditions under which analytical risk model outcomes can be over-ridden by decision-takers and the process of model performance monitoring and reporting. The emphasis is on an effective dialogue between business line and risk management, suitable independence of decision-takers, and a good understanding and robust challenge on the part of senior management.
Like other facets of risk management, analytical risk rating systems are not static and are subject to review and modification in light of the changing environment, the greater availability and quality of data and any deficiencies identified through internal and external regulatory review. Structured processes and metrics are in place to capture relevant data and feed this into continuous model improvement. See also the comments on ‘Model performance’ on page 48.
Credit risk models governance
All new or materially changed IRB capital models require the PRA’s approval, as set out in more detail on page 37, and throughout HSBC such models fall directly under the remit of the global functional MOCs. Additionally, the global functional MOCs are responsible for the approval of stress testing models


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
21


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


used for regulatory stress testing exercises such as those carried out by the European Banking Authority (‘EBA’) and the Bank of England.
The global functional MOCs are responsible for defining which models require their approval.
Wholesale MOC requires all credit risk models for which it is responsible to be approved by delegated senior managers with notification to the committee that retains the responsibility for oversight. RBWM MOC applies materiality thresholds for approval at the committee. For models falling below these thresholds, final approval is delegated to regional committees or Regional Heads of RBWM Risk.
Global Risk sets internal standards for the development, validation, independent review, approval, implementation and
 
performance monitoring of credit risk rating models. Independent reviews of our models are performed by our Independent Model Review (IMR) function which is separate from our Risk Analytics functions that are responsible for the development of models.
Compliance with Group standards is subject to examination both by Risk oversight and review from within the Risk function itself, and by Internal Audit.
Credit quality of assets
We are a universal bank with a conservative approach to credit risk. This is reflected in our credit risk profile being diversified across a number of asset classes and geographies with a credit quality profile mainly concentrated in the higher quality bands.

Table 14: Credit quality of assets
 
 
a
b
c
d
 
 
Gross carrying values of
Allowances/
impairments

Net values
(a+b-c)

 
 
Defaulted exposures

Non-defaulted exposures

 
 
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1
Loans
17.9

1,067.8

8.3

1,077.4

2
Debt Securities

377.4


377.4

3
Off-balance sheet exposures
1.5

735.0

0.3

736.2

4
Total at 31 Dec 2016
19.4

2,180.2

8.6

2,191.0

Table 15: Credit risk exposure – summary
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Exposure
value

Average
exposure
value3

RWAs

Capital
required

 
Footnotes
   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

IRB advanced approach
 
1,450.7

1,502.4

463.5

37.1

– central governments and central banks
 
339.4

346.6

35.4

2.8

– institutions
 
75.7

81.1

15.0

1.2

– corporates
1
583.1

591.2

314.0

25.1

– total retail
 
366.8

388.0

66.1

5.3

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
secured by mortgages on immovable property SME
 
1.5

2.4

0.3


secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
 
249.0

263.9

36.5

2.9

qualifying revolving retail
 
64.0

65.7

14.7

1.2

other SME
 
8.7

10.5

4.5

0.4

other non-SME
 
43.6

45.5

10.1

0.8

IRB securitisation positions
 
33.8

37.4

20.9

1.7

IRB non-credit obligation assets
 
51.9

58.1

12.1

1.0

IRB foundation approach
 
42.8

44.7

25.9

2.1

– central governments and central banks
 
0.1

0.1



– institutions
 
0.3

0.3

0.1


– corporates
 
42.4

44.3

25.8

2.1

Standardised approach
 
334.1

493.3

166.3

13.3

– central governments and central banks
 
167.3

192.9

14.7

1.2

– institutions
 
2.1

22.9

1.0

0.1

– corporates
 
78.4

164.4

75.0

6.0

– retail
 
22.0

35.5

16.3

1.3

– secured by mortgages on immovable property
 
25.7

35.5

9.3

0.7

– exposures in default
 
3.3

4.2

4.3

0.3

– regional governments or local authorities
 
2.9

2.8

0.9

0.1

– equity
2
15.2

10.5

33.6

2.7

– items associated with particularly high risk
 
3.4

4.2

5.1

0.4

– securitisation positions
 
0.9

0.8

0.9

0.1

– claims in the form of Collective investment undertakings (‘CIU’)
 
0.5

0.5

0.5


– international organisations
 
2.7

2.8



– multilateral development banks
 
0.2

0.2



– other items
 
9.5

16.1

4.7

0.4

At 31 Dec 2016
 
1,827.6

2,040.4

655.7

52.5



22
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 15: Credit risk exposure – summary (continued)
 
 
Exposure
value

Average
exposure
value3

RWAs

Capital
required

 
Footnotes
   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

IRB advanced approach
 
1,510.8

1,564.0

515.8

41.3

– central governments and central banks
 
327.4

331.8

49.4

4.0

– institutions
 
90.5

114.3

18.4

1.5

– corporates
1
597.3

617.0

314.3

25.1

– total retail
 
404.5

412.4

93.2

7.4

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
secured by mortgages on immovable property SME
 
2.9

3.0

0.6


secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
 
275.4

283.0

60.0

4.8

qualifying revolving retail
 
67.8

67.0

15.3

1.2

other SME
 
12.1

12.9

5.8

0.5

other non-SME
 
46.3

46.5

11.5

0.9

IRB securitisation positions
 
40.9

36.6

28.4

2.3

IRB non-credit obligation assets
 
50.2

51.9

12.1

1.0

IRB foundation approach
 
43.7

36.2

27.4

2.2

– central governments and central banks
 
0.1

0.1



– institutions
 
0.3

0.2

0.2


– corporates
 
43.3

35.9

27.2

2.2

Standardised approach
 
592.0

592.3

332.7

26.6

– central governments and central banks
 
199.9

194.5

20.0

1.6

– institutions
 
38.9

34.2

14.7

1.2

– corporates
 
226.4

234.3

210.6

16.8

– retail
 
44.2

45.7

32.5

2.6

– secured by mortgages on immovable property
 
40.3

39.4

14.4

1.2

– exposures in default
 
4.9

4.6

6.4

0.5

– regional governments or local authorities
 
2.8

1.9

1.0

0.1

– equity
2
7.0

9.1

12.2

1.0

– items associated with particularly high risk
 
4.4

4.4

6.6

0.5

– securitisation positions
 
0.7

0.6

0.7

0.1

– claims in the form of CIU
 
0.5

0.6

0.5


– international organisations
 
2.6

2.9



– other items
 
19.4

20.1

13.1

1.0

At 31 Dec 2015
 
2,146.5

2,192.5

875.9

70.1

1
Corporates includes specialised lending exposures subject to supervisory slotting approach of $33.1bn (2015: $24.9bn) and RWAs of $22.2bn (2015: $18.2bn).
2
This includes investment in Insurance companies that are risk weighted at 250%.
3
Average exposures are calculated by aggregating exposure value of the last five quarters and dividing by five.

HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
23


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 16: Credit risk exposure – by geographical region
 
 
Exposure value
 
 
Europe

Asia

MENA

North
America

Latin
America

Total

 
Footnotes
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

IRB advanced approach
 
459.1

693.8

22.9

263.1

11.8

1,450.7

– central governments and central banks
 
37.2

205.4

14.0

73.6

9.2

339.4

– institutions
 
14.2

52.5

1.8

6.8

0.4

75.7

– corporates
1
183.0

264.5

6.4

128.6

0.6

583.1

– total retail
 
187.9

130.4


48.5


366.8

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
secured by mortgages on immovable property SME
 
0.6

0.6


0.3


1.5

secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
 
118.5

90.6


39.9


249.0

qualifying revolving retail
 
28.0

32.2


3.8


64.0

other SME
 
8.4

0.1


0.2


8.7

other non-SME
 
32.4

6.9


4.3


43.6

IRB securitisation positions
 
29.0

0.8


4.0


33.8

IRB non-credit obligation assets
 
7.8

40.2

0.7

1.6

1.6

51.9

IRB foundation approach
 
26.1


16.7



42.8

– central governments and central banks
 


0.1



0.1

– institutions
 


0.3



0.3

– corporates
 
26.1


16.3



42.4

Standardised approach
 
172.2

85.8

41.3

15.6

19.2

334.1

– central governments and central banks
 
131.7

27.5

3.0

4.3

0.8

167.3

– institutions
 
0.3

0.2

1.4

0.2


2.1

– corporates
 
21.9

18.2

22.2

5.5

10.6

78.4

– retail
 
1.9

7.9

6.5

1.4

4.3

22.0

– secured by mortgages on immovable property
 
5.2

14.0

3.6

1.1

1.8

25.7

– exposures in default
 
1.0

0.4

1.2

0.3

0.4

3.3

– regional governments or local authorities
 


2.4


0.5

2.9

– equity
2
1.4

12.1

0.2

1.1

0.4

15.2

– items associated with particularly high risk
 
2.8


0.1

0.4

0.1

3.4

– securitisation positions 
 

0.8



0.1

0.9

– claims in the form of CIU
 
0.4


0.1



0.5

– international organisations
 
2.7





2.7

– multilateral development banks
 


0.2



0.2

– other items
 
2.9

4.7

0.4

1.3

0.2

9.5

At 31 Dec 2016
 
657.4

779.6

80.9

278.7

31.0

1,827.6


24
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 16: Credit risk exposure – by geographical region (continued)
 
 
Exposure value
 
 
Europe

Asia

MENA

North
America

Latin
America

Total

 
Footnotes
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

IRB advanced approach
 
541.8

659.5

25.6

261.4

22.5

1,510.8

– central governments and central banks
 
37.4

189.3

17.2

66.1

17.4

327.4

– institutions
 
26.1

52.4

1.0

9.0

2.0

90.5

– corporates
1
215.2

254.4

6.3

120.8

0.6

597.3

– total retail
 
217.8

126.4


60.3


404.5

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
secured by mortgages on immovable property SME
 
2.0

0.6


0.3


2.9

secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
 
136.7

88.6


50.1


275.4

qualifying revolving retail
 
33.2

30.6


4.0


67.8

other SME
 
11.6

0.1


0.4


12.1

other non-SME
 
34.3

6.5


5.5


46.3

IRB securitisation positions
 
36.9

0.3


3.7


40.9

IRB non-credit obligation assets
 
8.4

36.7

1.1

1.5

2.5

50.2

IRB foundation approach
 
27.7


16.0



43.7

– central governments and central banks
 


0.1



0.1

– institutions
 


0.3



0.3

– corporates
 
27.7


15.6



43.3

Standardised approach
 
164.4

302.0

51.2

30.8

43.6

592.0

– central governments and central banks
 
121.8

65.9

4.8

5.3

2.1

199.9

– institutions
 
0.2

36.6

2.0

0.1


38.9

– corporates
 
22.8

132.2

28.2

18.6

24.6

226.4

– retail
 
2.4

21.6

8.6

1.7

9.9

44.2

– secured by mortgages on immovable property
 
5.1

27.3

3.6

1.0

3.3

40.3

– exposures in default
 
1.1

0.4

1.0

0.8

1.6

4.9

– regional governments or local authorities
 


2.1


0.7

2.8

– equity
2
2.0

2.8

0.2

1.5

0.5

7.0

– items associated with particularly high risk
 
2.7


0.1

1.0

0.6

4.4

– securitisation positions
 

0.7




0.7

– claims in the form of CIU
 
0.3


0.2



0.5

– international organisations
 
2.6





2.6

– multilateral development banks
 






– other items
 
3.4

14.5

0.4

0.8

0.3

19.4

At 31 Dec 2015
 
733.9

961.5

92.8

292.2

66.1

2,146.5

For footnotes, see page 23.

HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
25


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 17: Credit risk RWAs – by geographical region
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RWAs
 
 
Europe

Asia

MENA

North
America

Latin
America

Total

 
Footnotes
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

IRB advanced approach
 
152.4

197.6

7.7

100.7

5.1

463.5

– central governments and central banks
 
3.9

15.9

5.3

6.4

3.9

35.4

– institutions
 
3.2

9.4

0.4

1.6

0.4

15.0

– corporates
1
98.4

143.4

1.7

70.3

0.2

314.0

– total retail
 
21.6

23.7


20.8


66.1

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
secured by mortgages on immovable property SME
 
0.2



0.1


0.3

secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
 
6.0

14.1


16.4


36.5

qualifying revolving retail
 
5.4

8.2


1.1


14.7

other SME
 
4.4



0.1


4.5

other non-SME
 
5.6

1.4


3.1


10.1

IRB securitisation positions
 
20.5

0.1


0.3


20.9

IRB non-credit obligation assets
 
4.8

5.1

0.3

1.3

0.6

12.1

IRB foundation approach
 
16.1


9.8



25.9

– central governments and central banks
 






– institutions
 


0.1



0.1

– corporates
 
16.1


9.7



25.8

Standardised approach
 
37.3

62.4

31.5

17.9

17.2

166.3

– central governments and central banks
 
3.1

1.5

0.7

8.2

1.2

14.7

– institutions
 
0.1

0.2

0.6

0.1


1.0

– corporates
 
21.0

17.2

21.2

5.0

10.6

75.0

– retail
 
1.4

5.9

4.8

1.1

3.1

16.3

– secured by mortgages on immovable property
 
2.0

4.9

1.3

0.5

0.6

9.3

– exposures in default
 
1.3

0.5

1.5

0.6

0.4

4.3

– regional governments or local authorities
 


0.6


0.3

0.9

– equity
2
2.7

29.1

0.2

1.1

0.5

33.6

– items associated with particularly high risk
 
4.2


0.2

0.6

0.1

5.1

– securitisation positions
 

0.7



0.2

0.9

– claims in the form of CIU
 
0.4


0.1



0.5

– international organisations
 






– other items 
 
1.1

2.4

0.3

0.7

0.2

4.7

At 31 Dec 2016
 
205.8

260.0

49.0

118.6

22.3

655.7


26
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 17: Credit risk RWAs – by geographical region (continued)
 
 
RWAs
 
 
Europe

Asia

MENA

North
America

Latin
America

Total

 
Footnotes
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

IRB advanced approach
 
173.9

195.9

10.7

122.5

12.8

515.8

– central governments and central banks
 
4.3

19.2

7.8

8.5

9.6

49.4

– institutions
 
4.7

9.0

0.3

2.5

1.9

18.4

– corporates
1
107.6

140.4

2.2

63.8

0.3

314.3

– total retail
 
25.2

21.8


46.2


93.2

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
secured by mortgages on immovable property SME
 
0.5



0.1


0.6

secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
 
7.5

12.5


40.0


60.0

qualifying revolving retail
 
6.1

8.0


1.2


15.3

other SME
 
5.6



0.2


5.8

other non-SME
 
5.5

1.3


4.7


11.5

IRB securitisation positions
 
27.9

0.1


0.4


28.4

IRB non-credit obligation assets
 
4.2

5.4

0.4

1.1

1.0

12.1

IRB foundation approach
 
17.5


9.9



27.4

– central governments and central banks
 






– institutions
 


0.2



0.2

– corporates
 
17.5


9.7



27.2

Standardised approach
 
40.2

177.7

38.6

33.9

42.3

332.7

– central governments and central banks
 
2.6

3.0

0.6

9.3

4.5

20.0

– institutions
 
0.1

13.7

0.8

0.1


14.7

– corporates
 
22.7

117.9

26.7

18.3

25.0

210.6

– retail
 
1.7

16.2

6.3

1.2

7.1

32.5

– secured by mortgages on immovable property
 
1.9

9.5

1.4

0.4

1.2

14.4

– exposures in default
 
1.3

0.5

1.4

1.2

2.0

6.4

– regional governments or local authorities
 


0.5


0.5

1.0

– equity
2
4.2

5.5

0.2

1.5

0.8

12.2

– items associated with particularly high risk
 
4.0


0.2

1.5

0.9

6.6

– securitisation positions
 

0.6



0.1

0.7

– claims in the form of CIU
 
0.3


0.2



0.5

– international organisations
 






– other items 
 
1.4

10.8

0.3

0.4

0.2

13.1

At 31 Dec 2015
 
231.6

373.6

59.2

156.4

55.1

875.9

For footnotes, see page 23.


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
27


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 18: Credit risk exposure – by industry sector
 
 
Exposure value
 
 
Personal

Manufacturing

International trade and services

Property and other business activities

Government and public administration

Other commercial

Financial

Non-customer assets

Total

 
Footnotes
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

IRB advanced approach
 
357.4

120.1

124.5

165.3

131.4

77.7

422.4

51.9

1,450.7

– central governments and central banks
 


0.2


115.3


223.9


339.4

– institutions
 





0.3

75.4


75.7

– corporates
1
0.3

119.8

123.4

157.6

15.8

77.0

89.2


583.1

– total retail
 
357.1

0.3

0.9

7.7

0.3

0.4

0.1


366.8

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
secured by mortgages on immovable property SME
 
0.5


0.1

0.8

0.1




1.5

secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
 
249.0








249.0

qualifying revolving retail
 
64.0








64.0

other SME
 

0.3

0.8

6.9

0.2

0.4

0.1


8.7

other non-SME
 
43.6








43.6

IRB securitisation positions
 






33.8


33.8

IRB non-credit obligation assets
 







51.9

51.9

IRB foundation approach
 
0.2

13.3

10.8

5.6

0.7

8.2

4.0


42.8

– central governments and central banks
 






0.1


0.1

– institutions
 


0.2


0.1




0.3

– corporates
 
0.2

13.3

10.6

5.6

0.6

8.2

3.9


42.4

Standardised approach
 
48.9

16.2

16.9

28.3

79.9

10.6

111.5

21.8

334.1

– central governments or central banks
 

0.1

0.2


73.1


88.2

5.7

167.3

– institutions
 






2.1


2.1

– corporates
 
1.6

15.3

16.1

26.2

2.0

9.9

7.3


78.4

– retail
 
20.7

0.1

0.1

0.7

0.1

0.1

0.2


22.0

– secured by mortgages on immovable property
 
25.3



0.3


0.1



25.7

– exposures in default
 
1.3

0.5

0.4

0.5

0.1

0.4

0.1


3.3

– regional governments or local authorities
 




1.7


1.2


2.9

– equity
2



0.1

0.2


2.6

12.3

15.2

– items associated with particularly high risk
 


0.1

0.3


0.1

2.9


3.4

– securitisation positions
 






0.9


0.9

– claims in the form of CIU
 






0.5


0.5

– international organisations





2.7




2.7

– multilateral development banks
 






0.2


0.2

– other items 
 

0.2


0.2



5.3

3.8

9.5

At 31 Dec 2016
 
406.5

149.6

152.2

199.2

212.0

96.5

537.9

73.7

1,827.6


28
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 18: Credit risk exposure – by industry sector (continued)
 
 
Exposure value
 
 
Personal

Manufacturing

International trade and services

Property and other business activities

Government and public administration

Other commercial

Financial

Non-customer assets

Total

 
Footnotes
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

IRB advanced approach
 
390.2

125.3

136.6

158.7

137.3

87.3

425.2

50.2

1,510.8

– central governments and central banks
 


0.1


119.9


207.4


327.4

– institutions
 




0.8

0.1

89.6


90.5

– corporates
1
0.4

124.9

135.4

146.4

16.3

86.7

87.2


597.3

– total retail
 
389.8

0.4

1.1

12.3

0.3

0.5

0.1


404.5

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
secured by mortgages on immovable property SME
 
0.5


0.1

2.3





2.9

secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
 
275.4








275.4

qualifying revolving retail
 
67.8








67.8

other SME
 

0.4

1.0

10.0

0.1

0.5

0.1


12.1

other non-SME
 
46.1




0.2




46.3

IRB securitisation positions
 






40.9


40.9

IRB non-credit obligation assets
 







50.2

50.2

IRB foundation approach
 

11.9

10.6

8.3

0.7

7.9

4.3


43.7

– central governments and central banks
 






0.1


0.1

– institutions
 






0.3


0.3

– corporates
 

11.9

10.6

8.3

0.7

7.9

3.9


43.3

Standardised approach
 
83.5

57.9

45.4

49.8

97.2

41.8

201.9

14.5

592.0

– central governments and central banks
 

0.1



70.2


121.9

7.7

199.9

– institutions
 






38.9


38.9

– corporates
 
1.5

56.2

43.5

46.1

21.9

40.2

17.0


226.4

– retail
 
40.8

0.6

1.0

1.2

0.1

0.3

0.2


44.2

– secured by mortgages on immovable property
 
39.7

0.1


0.4


0.1



40.3

– exposures in default
 
1.5

0.9

0.8

0.8

0.1

0.7

0.1


4.9

– regional governments or local authorities
 




2.3


0.5


2.8

– equity
2



0.1



3.4

3.5

7.0

– items associated with particularly high risk
 


0.1

1.1


0.5

2.7


4.4

– securitisation positions
 






0.7


0.7

– claims in the form of CIU
 






0.5


0.5

– international organisations
 




2.6




2.6

– multilateral development banks
 









– other items
 



0.1



16.0

3.3

19.4

At 31 Dec 2015
 
473.7

195.1

192.6

216.8

235.2

137.0

631.4

64.7

2,146.5

For footnotes, see page 23.


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
29


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 19: Credit risk exposure – by maturity
 
 
Exposure value
 
 
Less than
1 year

Between
1 and
5 years

More
than
5 years

Undated

Total

 
Footnotes
   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

IRB advanced approach
 
625.2

378.1

395.7

51.7

1,450.7

– central governments and central banks
 
203.9

87.7

47.8


339.4

– institutions
 
55.0

19.8

0.9


75.7

– corporates
1
274.4

241.8

66.9


583.1

– total retail
 
80.8

21.8

264.2


366.8

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
secured by mortgages on immovable property SME
 
0.2

0.3

1.0


1.5

secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
 
1.7

4.1

243.2


249.0

qualifying revolving retail
 
64.0




64.0

other SME
 
2.0

4.8

1.9


8.7

other non-SME
 
12.9

12.6

18.1


43.6

IRB securitisation positions
 
11.0

6.9

15.9


33.8

IRB non-credit obligation assets
 
0.1

0.1


51.7

51.9

IRB foundation approach
 
19.4

19.4

4.0


42.8

– central governments and central banks
 


0.1


0.1

– institutions
 

0.3



0.3

– corporates
 
19.4

19.1

3.9


42.4

Standardised approach
 
168.1

77.7

56.0

32.3

334.1

– central governments and central banks
 
101.9

40.6

19.0

5.8

167.3

– institutions
 
1.1

0.3

0.7


2.1

– corporates
 
50.1

21.1

7.2


78.4

– retail
 
8.2

9.4

4.4


22.0

– secured by mortgages on immovable property
 
2.0

2.5

21.2


25.7

– exposures in default
 
1.7

0.7

0.9


3.3

– regional governments or local authorities
 
1.2

0.4

1.3


2.9

– equity
2



15.2

15.2

– items associated with particularly high risk
 
0.4

0.6

0.1

2.3

3.4

– securitisation positions
 
0.2


0.7


0.9

– claims in the form of CIU
 
0.4



0.1

0.5

– international organisations
 
0.4

2.0

0.3


2.7

– multilateral development banks
 
0.2




0.2

– other items 
 
0.3

0.1

0.2

8.9

9.5

At 31 Dec 2016
 
812.7

475.2

455.7

84.0

1,827.6


30
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 19: Credit risk exposure – by maturity (continued)
 
 
Exposure value
 
 
Less than
1 year

Between
1 and
5 years

More
than
5 years

Undated

Total

 
Footnotes
   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

IRB advanced approach
 
654.2

376.1

430.4

50.1

1,510.8

– central governments and central banks
 
200.9

75.6

50.9


327.4

– institutions
 
66.9

20.1

3.5


90.5

– corporates
1
289.8

246.0

61.5


597.3

– total retail
 
86.7

23.8

294.0


404.5

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
secured by mortgages on immovable property SME
 
0.2

0.4

2.3


2.9

secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
 
2.4

4.2

268.8


275.4

qualifying revolving retail
 
67.8




67.8

other SME
 
2.4

6.4

3.3


12.1

other non-SME
 
13.9

12.8

19.6


46.3

IRB securitisation positions
 
9.9

10.5

20.5


40.9

IRB non-credit obligation assets
 

0.1


50.1

50.2

IRB foundation approach
 
20.0

19.1

4.6


43.7

– central governments and central banks
 


0.1


0.1

– institutions
 
0.1

0.2



0.3

– corporates
 
19.9

18.9

4.5


43.3

Standardised approach
 
230.0

207.5

120.8

33.7

592.0

– central governments and central banks
 
126.2

48.0

18.0

7.7

199.9

– institutions
 
22.4

0.5

16.0


38.9

– corporates
 
60.1

136.7

29.6


226.4

– retail
 
11.9

14.1

18.2


44.2

– secured by mortgages on immovable property
 
2.3

2.6

35.4


40.3

– exposures in default
 
2.6

1.2

1.1


4.9

– regional governments or local authorities
 
1.2

1.2

0.4


2.8

– equity
2



7.0

7.0

– items associated with particularly high risk
 
0.4

1.6

0.7

1.7

4.4

– securitisation positions
 


0.7


0.7

– claims in the form of CIU
 
0.4



0.1

0.5

– international organisations
 
0.4

1.6

0.6


2.6

– multilateral development banks
 





– other items
 
2.1


0.1

17.2

19.4

At 31 Dec 2015
 
904.2

602.7

555.8

83.8

2,146.5

For footnotes, see page 23.

Past due but not impaired exposures, impaired exposures, renegotiated exposures and credit risk adjustments
Tables 20 to 23 analyse past due but not impaired exposures, impaired exposures, renegotiated exposures and impairment allowances and other credit risk provisions on a regulatory consolidation basis. These tables use accounting values. The proportional consolidation of associates is the main difference between the amounts presented here and those on a financial consolidation basis.
Our approach for determining impairment allowances is explained on page 231 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016, and the Group’s definitions for accounting purposes of ‘past
 
due’, ‘impaired’ and ‘renegotiated’ are set out on pages 121, 123 and 107, respectively. The accounting definition of impaired and the regulatory definition of default are generally aligned. In certain jurisdictions, for certain retail exposures, regulatory default is identified at 180 days past due, while the exposures are identified as impaired at 90 days past due. In the retail portfolio in the US, for accounting purposes, a renegotiation would normally trigger identification as ‘impaired’, whereas for regulatory purposes, default is identified mainly based on the 180 days past due criterion.
Under the accounting standards currently adopted by HSBC, impairment allowances, value adjustments and credit-related provisions for off-balance sheet amounts are treated as specific Credit risk adjustments (‘CRAs’).

Table 20: Ageing analysis of accounting past due and not impaired exposures
 
Europe

Asia

MENA

North America

Latin America

Total

Up to 29 days
876

2,769

1,163

2,016

395

7,219

30-59 days
220

506

177

402

86

1,391

60-89 days
110

187

136

128

48

609

90-179 days

11

38

3


52

180 days and over

11

11



22

Total at Dec 2016
1,206

3,484

1,525

2,549

529

9,293


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
31


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 21: Breakdown of renegotiated exposures between impaired and non-impaired exposures
 
First lien residential mortgages

Other personal lending

Corporate and commercial

Non-bank financial institutions

Renegotiated
loans at
31 Dec
2016

 
$m

$m

$m

$m

$m

Neither past due nor impaired
976

282

1,848

260

3,366

Past due but not impaired
346

78

301


725

Impaired
2,751

325

5,416

257

8,749

Renegotiated loans at 31 Dec 2016
4,073

685

7,565

517

12,840

Impairment allowances on renegotiated loans
267

150

1,667

130

2,214

 
 
 
 
 
 
Neither past due nor impaired
3,973

716

2,152

391

7,232

Past due but not impaired
1,753

243

123

24

2,143

Impaired
6,556

733

6,094

201

13,584

Renegotiated loans at 31 Dec 2015
12,282

1,692

8,369

616

22,959

Impairment allowances on renegotiated loans
871

251

2,097

120

3,339

Table 22: Amount of impaired exposures and related allowances, broken down by geographical region
 
Europe

Asia

MENA

North
America

Latin America

Total

31 Dec 2016
$m

$m

$m

$m

$m

$m

Past due but not impaired exposures
1,206

3,484

1,525

2,549

529

9,293

– personal
769

2,351

558

1,399

381

5,458

– corporate and commercial
423

1,084

861

754

146

3,268

– financial
14

49

106

396

2

567

Impaired exposures
8,137

2,561

2,449

5,891

621

19,659

– personal
1,953

579

545

4,226

261

7,564

– corporate and commercial
5,903

1,954

1,726

1,660

360

11,603

– financial
281

28

178

5


492

Impairment allowances and other credit risk provisions
(2,859
)
(1,640
)
(1,942
)
(1,705
)
(486
)
(8,632
)
– personal
(530
)
(283
)
(571
)
(605
)
(263
)
(2,252
)
– corporate and commercial
(2,114
)
(1,348
)
(1,185
)
(1,080
)
(223
)
(5,950
)
– financial
(215
)
(9
)
(186
)
(20
)

(430
)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
31 Dec 2015
 
 
 
 
 
 
Past due but not impaired exposures
1,589

4,925

1,498

5,466

1,252

14,730

– personal
876

2,935

605

3,332

790

8,538

– corporate and commercial
699

1,948

795

1,868

460

5,770

– financial
14

42

98

266

2

422

Impaired exposures
10,385

4,095

2,801

9,135

3,151

29,567

– personal
2,121

817

642

8,130

857

12,567

– corporate and commercial
6,582

3,267

1,920

1,003

2,285

15,057

– financial
1,682

11

239

2

9

1,943

Impairment allowances and other credit risk provisions
(3,503
)
(4,087
)
(2,035
)
(2,235
)
(2,168
)
(14,028
)
– personal
(653
)
(735
)
(562
)
(1,232
)
(872
)
(4,054
)
– corporate and commercial
(2,655
)
(3,339
)
(1,279
)
(971
)
(1,296
)
(9,540
)
– financial
(195
)
(13
)
(194
)
(32
)

(434
)

32
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 23: Movement in specific credit risk adjustments by industry and geographical region
 
Europe

Asia

MENA

North
America

Latin
America

Total

 
$m

$m

$m

$m

$m

$m

Specific credit risk adjustments at 1 Jan 2016
3,503

4,087

2,035

2,235

2,168

14,028

Amounts written off
(1,141
)
(648
)
(363
)
(665
)
(637
)
(3,454
)
– personal
(412
)
(358
)
(208
)
(284
)
(340
)
(1,602
)
– corporate and commercial
(728
)
(285
)
(137
)
(381
)
(297
)
(1,828
)
– financial
(1
)
(5
)
(18
)


(24
)
Recoveries of amounts written off in previous years
260

149

44

73

100

626

– personal
225

124

34

54

78

515

– corporate and commercial
33

24

10

18

22

107

– financial
2

1


1


4

Charge to income statement
575

675

352

796

1,164

3,562

– personal
155

274

226

219

832

1,706

– corporate and commercial
386

399

113

587

332

1,817

– financial
34

2

13

(10
)

39

Exchange and other movements
(338
)
(2,623
)
(126
)
(734
)
(2,309
)
(6,130
)
Specific credit risk adjustments at 31 Dec 2016
2,859

1,640

1,942

1,705

486

8,632

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Specific credit risk adjustments at 1 Jan 2015
3,946

3,883

2,117

2,764

2,621

15,331

Amounts written off
(1,123
)
(595
)
(508
)
(662
)
(1,306
)
(4,194
)
– personal
(467
)
(416
)
(273
)
(554
)
(997
)
(2,707
)
– corporate and commercial
(644
)
(179
)
(235
)
(106
)
(309
)
(1,473
)
– financial
(12
)


(2
)

(14
)
Recoveries of amounts written off in previous years
368

165

53

76

146

808

– personal
320

135

50

57

119

681

– corporate and commercial
46

30

3

18

27

124

– financial
2



1


3

Charge to income statement
563

1,392

507

547

1,450

4,459

– personal
109

334

281

157

983

1,864

– corporate and commercial
440

1,058

216

397

467

2,578

– financial
14


10

(7
)

17

Exchange and other movements
(251
)
(758
)
(134
)
(490
)
(743
)
(2,376
)
Specific credit risk adjustments at 31 Dec 2015
3,503

4,087

2,035

2,235

2,168

14,028


Risk mitigation
Our approach when granting credit facilities is to do so on the basis of capacity to repay, rather than placing primary reliance on credit risk mitigants. Depending on a customer’s standing and the type of product, facilities may be provided unsecured. Mitigation of credit risk is a key aspect of effective risk management and takes many forms.
Our general policy is to promote the use of credit risk mitigation, justified by commercial prudence and capital efficiency. Specifically, detailed policies cover the acceptability, structuring and terms with regard to the availability of credit risk mitigation; for example in the form of collateral security. These policies, together with the setting of suitable valuation parameters, are subject to regular review to ensure that they are supported by empirical evidence and continue to fulfil their intended purpose.
Collateral
The most common method of mitigating credit risk is to take collateral. In our retail residential and commercial real estate (‘CRE’) businesses, a mortgage over the property is usually taken to help secure claims. Physical collateral is also taken in various forms of specialised lending and leasing transactions where income from the physical assets that are financed is also the principal source of facility repayment. In the commercial and industrial sectors, charges are created over business assets such as premises, stock and debtors. Loans to private banking clients may be made against a pledge of eligible marketable securities, cash or real estate. Facilities to SMEs are commonly granted against guarantees given by their owners and/or directors.
 

For credit risk mitigants comprising immovable property, the key determinant of concentration at Group level is geographic. Use of immovable property mitigants for risk management purposes is predominantly in Asia and Europe.
Further information regarding collateral held over CRE and residential property is provided on pages 130 and 136, respectively, of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Financial collateral
In the institutional sector, trading facilities are supported by charges over financial instruments, such as cash, debt securities and equities. Financial collateral in the form of marketable securities is used in much of the Group’s derivatives activities and in securities financing transactions, such as repos, reverse repos, securities lending and borrowing. Netting is used extensively and is a prominent feature of market standard documentation.
Further information regarding collateral held for trading exposures is on page 78.
In the non-trading book, we provide customers with working capital management products. Some of these products have loans and advances to customers, and customer accounts where we have rights of offset and comply with the regulatory requirements for on-balance sheet netting. Under on-balance netting, the customer accounts are treated as cash collateral and the effects of this collateral are incorporated in our LGD estimates. For risk management purposes, the net amounts of such exposures are subject to limits and the relevant customer agreements are subject to review to ensure the legal right of offset remains appropriate. At 31 December 2016, circa $35bn of customer accounts were treated as cash collateral, mainly in the UK.


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
33


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Other forms of credit risk mitigation
Our Global Banking and Markets (‘GB&M’) business utilises credit risk mitigation to manage the credit risk of its portfolios, with the goal of reducing concentrations in individual names, sectors or portfolios. The techniques in use include Credit default swap (‘CDS’) purchases, structured credit notes and securitisation structures. Buying credit protection creates credit exposure against the protection provider, which is monitored as part of the overall credit exposure to them. Where applicable, the transaction is entered into directly with a central clearing house counterparty, otherwise our exposure to CDS protection providers is diversified among mainly banking counterparties with strong credit ratings. In our corporate lending, we also take guarantees from corporates and Export Credit Agencies (‘ECA’). Corporates would normally provide guarantees as part of a parent/subsidiary or common parent relationship and would span a number of credit grades. The ECAs will normally be investment grade.
Policy and procedures
Policies and procedures govern the protection of our position from the outset of a customer relationship; for instance, in requiring standard terms and conditions or specifically agreed documentation permitting the offset of credit balances against debt obligations, and through controls over the integrity, current valuation and, if necessary, realisation of collateral security.
Valuing collateral
Valuation strategies are established to monitor collateral mitigants to ensure that they will continue to provide the anticipated secure secondary repayment source. Where collateral is subject to high volatility, valuation is frequent; where stable, less so. For market trading activities such as collateralised over-the-counter (‘OTC’) derivatives and SFTs, we typically carry out daily valuations. In the residential mortgage business, Group policy prescribes revaluation at intervals of up to three years, or more frequently as the need arises; for example, where market conditions are subject to significant change. Residential property collateral values are determined through a combination of professional appraisals, house price indices or statistical analysis.
Local market conditions determine the frequency of valuation for CRE. Revaluations are sought where, for example, material concerns arise in relation to the performance of the collateral. CRE revaluation also occurs commonly in circumstances where an obligor’s credit quality has declined sufficiently to cause concern that the principal payment source may not fully meet the obligation.
Recognition of risk mitigation under the IRB approach
Within an IRB approach, risk mitigants are considered in two broad categories:
those which reduce the intrinsic PD of an obligor and therefore operate as determinants of PD; and
those which affect the estimated recoverability of obligations and require adjustment of LGD or, in certain limited circumstances, EAD.
The first category typically includes full parental guarantees – where one obligor within a group guarantees another. It is assumed that the guarantor’s performance materially informs the PD of the guaranteed entity. PD estimates are also subject to a ‘sovereign ceiling’, constraining the risk ratings assigned to obligors in countries of higher risk, and where only partial parental support exists. In certain jurisdictions, certain types of third-party guarantee are recognised by substituting the obligor’s PD, with the guarantor’s PD.
In the second category, LGD estimates are affected by a wider range of collateral, including cash, charges over real estate
 
property, fixed assets, trade goods, receivables and floating charges such as mortgage debentures. Unfunded mitigants, such as third-party guarantees, are also considered in LGD estimates where there is evidence that they reduce loss expectation.
The main types of provider of guarantees are banks, other financial institutions and corporates. The creditworthiness of providers of unfunded credit risk mitigation is taken into consideration as part of the guarantor’s risk profile. Internal limits for such contingent exposure are approved in the same way as direct exposures.
EAD and LGD values, in the case of individually assessed exposures, are determined by reference to regionally approved internal risk parameters based on the nature of the exposure. For retail portfolios, credit risk mitigation data is incorporated into the internal risk parameters for exposures and feeds into the calculation of the Expected Loss (‘EL’) band value summarising both customer delinquency and product or facility risk. Credit and credit risk mitigation data form inputs submitted by all Group offices to centralised databases. A range of collateral recognition approaches are applied to IRB capital treatments:
unfunded protection, which includes credit derivatives and guarantees, is reflected through adjustment or determination of PD or LGD. Under the IRB advanced approach, recognition may be through PD or LGD, or both;
eligible financial collateral under the IRB advanced approach is recognised in LGD models. Under the IRB foundation approach, regulatory LGD values are adjusted. The adjustment to LGD is based on the degree to which the exposure value would be adjusted notionally if the financial collateral comprehensive method were applied; and
for all other types of collateral, including real estate, the LGD for exposures calculated under the IRB advanced approach are calculated by models. For IRB foundation, base regulatory LGDs are adjusted depending on the value and type of the asset taken as collateral relative to the exposure. The types of eligible mitigant recognised under the IRB foundation approach are more limited.
Table 51 in Appendix I sets out, for IRB exposures, the exposure value and the effective value of credit risk mitigation expressed as the exposure value covered by the credit risk mitigant. IRB credit risk mitigation reductions of EAD were immaterial at 31 December 2016.
Recognition of risk mitigation under the standardised approach
Where credit risk mitigation is available in the form of an eligible guarantee, non-financial collateral or credit derivatives, the exposure is divided into covered and uncovered portions. The covered portion, which is determined after applying an appropriate ‘haircut’ for currency and maturity mismatches (and for omission of restructuring clauses for credit derivatives, where appropriate) to the amount of the protection provided, attracts the risk weight of the protection provider. The uncovered portion attracts the risk weight of the obligor. For exposures fully or partially covered by eligible financial collateral, the value of the exposure is adjusted under the financial collateral comprehensive method using supervisory volatility adjustments, including those arising from currency mismatch, which are determined by the specific type of collateral (and, in the case of eligible debt securities, their credit quality) and its liquidation period. The adjusted exposure value is subject to the risk weight of the obligor.


34
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 24: Credit risk mitigation techniques – overview
 
 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
 
 
Exposures unsecured: carrying amount

Exposures secured
by collateral
Exposures secured
by financial guarantees
Exposures secured by credit derivatives
 
 
 
of which: secured amount

 
of which: secured amount

 
of which: secured amount

 
 
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1
Loans
601.2

402.0

362.2

68.1

64.4

6.1

5.0

2
Debt securities
370.1

2.0

1.9

5.3

5.2



3
Total at 31 Dec 2016
971.3

404.0

364.1

73.4

69.6

6.1

5.0

4
Of which defaulted
9.5

4.3

3.1

0.1




Table 25: Standardised approach – credit risk exposure and Credit Risk Mitigation (CRM) effects
 
 
a
b
c
d
e
f
 
 
Exposures before CCF
and CRM
Exposures post-CCF
and CRM
RWA and RWA density
 
 
On-balance sheet amount

Off-balance sheet amount

On-balance sheet amount

Off-balance sheet amount

RWA

RWA density %
 
 
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn
 
Asset classes1
 
 
 
 
 
 
1
Central governments and central banks
161.9

1.5

166.2

1.1

14.7

9
2
Institutions
2.2


2.1


1.0

46
3
Corporates
80.2

79.9

66.3

12.1

75.0

96
4
Retail
22.7

44.2

21.6

0.4

16.3

74
5
Secured by mortgages on immovable property
25.5

0.8

25.5

0.2

9.3

36
6
Exposures in default
3.2

0.4

3.2

0.1

4.3

130
7
Regional governments or local authorities
2.9

0.3

2.9


0.9

32
8
Equity exposures
15.2


15.2


33.6

221
9
Items associated with particularly high risk
2.1

1.4

2.1

1.3

5.1

150
10
Claims in the form of CIU
0.5


0.5


0.5

100
11
Public sector entities





12
Claims on institutions and corporates with a short-term credit assessment





13
Covered bonds





14
International organisations
2.7


2.7



15
Multilateral development banks
0.2


0.2



5
16
Other items
9.5


9.5


4.7

50
17
Total at 31 Dec 2016
328.8

128.5

318.0

15.2

165.4

50
1
Securitisation positions are not included in this table.


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
35


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 26: Standardised approach – exposures by asset classes and risk weights
 
 
a
b
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
p
 
Risk weight
0
%
2
%
20
%
35
%
50
%
70
%
75
%
100
%
150
%
250
%
Total credit exposure amount (post-CCF and post-CRM)

 
 
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 
Asset classes1
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1
Central governments or central banks
160.4


0.8


0.3



0.2


5.6

167.3

2
Institutions

0.1

0.8


0.7



0.5



2.1

3
Corporates


2.1

0.2

2.7

0.1


72.6

0.7


78.4

4
Retail






22.0




22.0

5
Secured by mortgages on immovable property



25.2




0.5



25.7

6
Exposures in default







1.3

2.0


3.3

7
Regional governments or local authorities
0.2


1.8


0.7



0.2



2.9

8
Equity exposures







2.9


12.3

15.2

9
Items associated with particularly high risk








3.4


3.4

10
Claims in the form of CIU







0.5



0.5

11
Public sector entities











12
Claims on institutions and corporates with a short-term credit assessment











13
Covered bonds











14
International organisations
2.7










2.7

15
Multilateral development banks
0.1


0.1








0.2

16
Other items
0.7


5.1





3.7



9.5

17
Total at 31 Dec 2016
164.1

0.1

10.7

25.4

4.4

0.1

22.0

82.4

6.1

17.9

333.2

1
Securitisation positions are not included in this table.

Table 27: IRB – Effect on RWA of credit derivatives used as CRM techniques
 
 
a
b
 
 
Pre-credit derivatives RWA

Actual RWA

 
 
$bn

$bn

 
IRB advanced approach1
 
 
2
Central governments and central banks
5.9

5.9

4
Institutions
2.7

2.7

6
Total corporates
119.6

118.5

6.1
– corporates – SME


6.2
– corporates – specialised lending
14.4

14.4

6.3
– corporates – other
105.2

104.1

14
Equity


20
Total retail
31.5

31.5

10
– Secured by mortgages on immovable property SME


10.1
– Secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
18.4

18.4

9
– Qualifying revolving retail exposures
4.4

4.4

18
– Other SME
3.0

3.0

19
– Other non-SME
5.7

5.7

 
IRB foundation approach
 
 
1
Central governments and central banks


3
Institutions


5
Total corporates
0.3

0.3

5.1
– corporates – SME


5.2
– corporates – specialised lending


5.3
– corporates – other
0.3

0.3

13
Equity


 
Total at 31 Dec 2016
160.0

158.9

1
Securitisation positions are not included in this table.


36
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 28: Credit derivatives exposures
 
 
 
 
a
b
a
b
 
 
2016
2015
 
Footnote
Protection bought

Protection sold

Protection bought

Protection sold

 
 
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

Notionals
 
 
 
 
 
Credit derivative products used for own credit portfolio
 
 
 
 
 
– Index credit default swaps
 
4.6

1.9

3.5

0.7

– Total return swaps
 




Total notionals
 
4.6

1.9

3.5

0.7

Credit derivative products used for intermediation
1
 
 
 
 
– Index credit default swaps
 
214.6

207.4

222.5

217.7

– Total return swaps
 
12.3

7.0

11.2

7.7

Total notionals
 
226.9

214.4

233.7

225.4

Total credit derivative notionals
 
231.5

216.3

237.2

226.1

Fair values
 
 
 
 
 
– Positive fair value (asset)
 
2.3

2.9

5.1

2.2

– Negative fair value (liability)
 
(3.1
)
(2.7
)
(1.8
)
(3.9
)
1
This is where we act as an intermediary for our clients, enabling them to take a position in the underlying securities. This does not increase risk for HSBC.
The above table shows the Credit Derivative exposures that HSBC holds split between those amounts due to client intermediation and those amounts booked as part of HSBC’s own credit portfolio. Where the credit derivative is used to hedge our own portfolio the resulting credit risk impact is seen in table 28 above and no counterparty credit risk capital requirement arises. For a discussion on hedging risk and monitoring the continuing effectiveness of hedges refer to page 233 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Global risk
Application of the IRB approach
Our Group IRB credit risk rating framework incorporates obligor propensity to default expressed in PD, and loss severity in the event of default expressed in EAD and LGD. These measures are used to calculate regulatory EL and capital requirements. They are also used with other inputs to inform rating assessments for the purposes of credit approval and many other purposes, for example:
credit approval and monitoring: IRB models are used in the assessment of customer and portfolio risk in lending decisions;
risk appetite: IRB measures are an important element in identifying risk exposure at customer, sector and portfolio level;
pricing: IRB parameters are used in pricing tools for new transactions and reviews; and
economic capital and portfolio management: IRB parameters are used in the economic capital model that has been implemented across HSBC.
Roll-out of the IRB approach
With the PRA’s permission, we have adopted the advanced approach for the majority of our business. At the end of 2016, portfolios in much of Europe, Asia and North America were on advanced IRB approaches. Others remain on the standardised or foundation approaches pending the development of models for the PRA’s approval in line with our IRB roll-out plans where the primary focus is on corporate and retail exposures.
At 31 December 2016, 80% of the exposures were treated under advanced IRB, 2% under foundation IRB and 18% under standardised approach.
 
EL and credit risk adjustments
We analyse credit loss experience in order to assess the performance of our risk measurement and control processes, and to inform our understanding of the implications for risk and capital management of dynamic changes occurring in the risk profile of our exposures.
This analysis includes comparison of the EL calculated in the use of IRB risk rating models, which drives part of the regulatory capital calculation, with other reported measures of credit loss within financial statements prepared under IFRSs. These measures include loan impairment allowances, value adjustments and credit-related provisions for off-balance sheet amounts, collectively referred to as CRAs. The excess of EL over CRAs is treated as a capital deduction in the composition of regulatory capital.
The disclosures below set out:
commentary on aspects of the relationship between regulatory EL and CRAs recognised in our financial statements; and
tables of EL and CRA balances, and charges during the period by exposure class (within retail IRB, also by sub-class) and by region.
When comparing EL with measures of credit losses under IFRSs, it is necessary to take into account differences in the definition and scope of each. Below are examples of matters that can give rise to material differences in the way economic, business and methodological drivers are reflected quantitatively in the accounting and regulatory measures of loss.
Tables 49 and 50 in Appendix I set out for IRB credit exposures the EL, CRA balances and actual loss experience reflected in the charges for CRAs.
CRA balances represent management’s best estimate of losses incurred in the loan portfolios at the balance sheet date. Charges for CRAs represent a movement in the CRA balance during the year, reflecting loss events that occurred during the financial year and changes in estimates of losses arising on events that occurred prior to the current year. EL represents the one-year regulatory expected loss accumulated in the book and is calculated at a PIT.


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
37


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Examples of differences in definition and scope between EL and CRA balances:
Under IAS 39, our estimates of loss in impairment allowances are required to reflect the current circumstances and specific cash flow expectations of a customer. EL is based on modelled estimates and although the estimates may be individually assigned to specific exposures, the statistical nature of these models means that they are influenced by the behaviour of the overall portfolio;
EL is based on exposure values that incorporate expected future drawings of committed credit lines, while CRAs are recognised in respect of financial assets recognised on the balance sheet and in respect of committed credit lines where a loss is probable;
EL is generally based on through-the-cycle (‘TTC’) estimates of PD over a one-year future horizon, determined via statistical analysis of historical default experience. CRAs are recognised for losses that have been incurred at the balance sheet date;
in the majority of cases, EL is based on economic downturn estimates of LGD, while CRAs are measured using estimated future cash flows at the balance sheet date;
EL incorporates LGD, which may discount recoveries at a different rate from the effective interest rate employed in discounted cash flow analysis for CRAs;
LGDs typically include all costs associated with recovery, whereas the accounting measurement considers only the costs of obtaining and selling collateral;
In the foundation IRB approach, LGD and the conversion factors used to calculate EAD are set by regulations, and may differ significantly from the accounting assumptions about estimated cash flows;
for EL, certain exposures are subject to regulatory minimum thresholds for one or more parameters, whereas credit losses under IFRSs are determined using management’s judgement about estimated future cash flows; and
in the case of EL, to meet regulatory prudential standards, HSBC’s model philosophy favours the incorporation of conservative estimation to accommodate uncertainty; for instance where modelling portfolios with limited data. Under IFRSs, uncertainty is considered when forming management’s estimates of future cash flows, using balanced and neutral judgement.
Qualitative disclosures on banks’ use of external credit ratings under the standardised approach for credit risk
The standardised approach is applied where exposures do not qualify for use of an IRB approach and/or where an exemption from IRB has been granted. The standardised approach requires banks to use risk assessments prepared by External Credit Assessment Institution (‘ECAIs’) or ECAs to determine the risk weightings applied to rated counterparties.
ECAI risk assessments are used within the Group as part of the determination of risk weightings for the following classes of exposure:
central governments and central banks;
institutions;
corporates;
securitisation positions;
short-term claims on institutions and corporates;
regional governments and local authorities; and
multilateral development banks.
We have nominated three ECAIs for this purpose – Moody’s Investor Service (‘Moody’s’), Standard and Poor’s rating agency (‘S&P’) and Fitch Ratings (‘Fitch’). We have not nominated any ECAs.
Data files of external ratings from the nominated ECAIs are matched with customer records in our centralised credit database.
 
When calculating the risk-weighted value of an exposure using ECAI risk assessments, risk systems identify the customer in question and look up the available ratings in the central database according to the rating selection rules. The systems then apply the prescribed credit quality step mapping to derive from the rating the relevant risk weight.
All other exposure classes are assigned risk weightings as prescribed in the PRA’s Rulebook.
Credit quality step
Moody’s assessments
S&P’s
assessments
Fitch’s
assessments
1
Aaa to Aa3
AAA to AA–
AAA to AA–
2
A1 to A3
A+ to A–
A+ to A–
3
Baa1 to Baa3
BBB+ to BBB–
BBB+ to BBB–
4
Ba1 to Ba3
BB+ to BB–
BB+ to BB–
5
B1 to B3
B+ to B–
B+ to B–
6
Caa1 and below
CCC+ and below
CCC+ and below
Exposures to, or guaranteed by, central governments and central banks of European Economic Area (‘EEA’) States and denominated in local currency are risk-weighted at 0% using the standardised approach, provided they would be eligible under that approach for a 0% risk weighting.
Wholesale risk
The wholesale risk rating system
This section describes how we operate our credit risk analytical models and use IRB metrics in the wholesale customer business.
PDs for wholesale customer segments (that is central governments and central banks, financial institutions and corporate customers) and for certain individually assessed personal customers are estimated using a CRR master scale of 23 grades. Of these, 21 are non-default grades representing varying degrees of strength of financial condition, and two are default grades.
The score generated by a credit risk rating model for the obligor is mapped to a corresponding PD and master-scale CRR. The CRR is then reviewed by a credit approver who, taking into account information such as the most recent events and market data, makes the final decision on the rating. The rating assigned reflects the approver’s overall view of the obligor’s credit standing.
The finally assigned CRR determines the applicable master-scale PD range from which the reference PD is used in the regulatory capital calculation.
Relationship managers may propose a different CRR from that indicated through an override process which must be approved by the Credit function. Overrides for each model are recorded and monitored as part of the model management process.
The CRR is assigned at an obligor level. Unfunded credit risk mitigants, such as guarantees, may also influence the final assignment of a CRR to an obligor. The effect of unfunded risk mitigants is considered for IRB approaches in table 51 and for the standardised approach in table 52.
If an obligor is in default on any material credit obligation to the Group, all of the obligor’s facilities from the Group are considered to be in default.
Under the IRB approach, obligors are grouped into grades that have similar PD or anticipated default frequency. The anticipated default frequency may be estimated using all relevant information at the relevant date (PIT rating system) or be free of the effects of the credit cycle (TTC rating system).
We generally utilise a hybrid approach of PIT and TTC. That is, while models are calibrated to long-run default rates, obligor ratings are reviewed annually, or more frequently if necessary,


38
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

to reflect changes in their circumstances and/or their economic operating environment.
Our policy requires approvers to downgrade ratings on expectations but to upgrade them only on performance. This leads to expected defaults typically exceeding actual defaults.
For EAD and LGD estimation, operating entities are permitted, subject to overview by Group Risk, to use their own modelling approaches to suit conditions in their jurisdictions. Group Risk provides co-ordination, benchmarks, and promotion of best practice on EAD and LGD estimation.
EAD is estimated to a 12-month forward time horizon and represents the current exposure plus an estimate for future increases in exposure, and the realisation of contingent exposures post-default.
LGD is based on the effects of facility and collateral structure on outcomes post-default. This includes such factors as the type of client, the facility seniority, the type and value of collateral, past recovery experience and priority under law. It is expressed as a percentage of EAD.
Wholesale models
To determine credit ratings for the different types of wholesale obligor, multiple models and scorecards are used for PD, LGD, and EAD. These models may be differentiated by region, customer segment and/or customer size. For example, PD models are differentiated for all of our key customer segments, including sovereigns, financial institutions and large-,medium- and small-sized corporates.
Global PD models have been developed for asset classes or clearly identifiable segments of asset classes where the customer relationship is managed globally; for example, sovereigns, financial institutions and the largest corporate clients that typically operate internationally.
Local PD models, specific to a particular country, region, or sector, are developed for other obligors. This includes corporate clients when they show distinct characteristics in common in a particular geography.
The two major drivers of model methodology are the nature of the portfolio and the availability of internal or external data on historical defaults and risk factors. For some historically low-default portfolios, e.g. sovereign and financial institutions, a model will rely more heavily on external data and/or the input of an expert panel. Where sufficient data is available, models are built on a statistical basis, although the input of expert judgement may still form an important part of the overall model development methodology.
 
Most LGD and EAD models are developed according to local circumstances, considering legal and procedural differences in the recovery and workout processes. Our approach to EAD and LGD also encompasses global models for central governments and central banks, and for institutions, as exposures to these customer types are managed centrally by Global Risk. The PRA requires all firms to apply an LGD floor of 45% for senior unsecured exposure to sovereign entities. This floor was applied to reflect the relatively few loss observations across all firms in relation to these obligors. This floor is applied for the purposes of regulatory capital reporting.
The PRA has published guidance on the appropriateness of LGD models for low default portfolios. It states there should be at least 20 defaults per country per collateral type for LGD models to be approved. Where there are insufficient defaults, an LGD floor will be applied. As a result, in 2016, we continued to apply LGD floors for our banks portfolio and some Asian corporate portfolios where there were insufficient loss observations.
In the same guidance, the PRA also indicated that it considered income-producing real estate to be an asset class that would be difficult to model. As a result, RWAs for our UK CRE portfolio and US income-producing CRE portfolio are calculated using the supervisory slotting approach.
Local models for the corporate exposure class are developed using various data inputs, including collateral information and geography (for LGD) and product type (for EAD). The most material corporate models are the UK and Asia models, all of which are developed using more than 10 years’ worth of data. The LGD models are calibrated to a period of credit stress or downturn in economic conditions.
None of the EAD models are calibrated for a downturn, as analysis shows that utilisation decreases during a downturn because credit stress is accompanied by more intensive limit monitoring and facility reduction.
Table 29 sets out the key characteristics of the significant wholesale credit risk models that drive the capital calculation split by regulatory wholesale asset class, with their associated RWAs, including the number of models for each component, the model method or approach and the number of years of loss data used.


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
39


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 29: Wholesale IRB credit risk models
Regulatory asset
classes measured
RWAs for
associated
asset class
$bn
Component
Number of
significant
models

Model description and methodology
Number
of years
loss data

Regulatory Floors
Central governments and central banks
35.4
PD
1

A shadow rating approach that includes macroeconomic and political factors, constrained with expert judgement.
>10

No
LGD
1

An unsecured model built on assessment of structural factors that influence the country’s long-term economic performance. For unsecured LGD, a floor of 45% is applied.
8

45%
EAD
1

A cross-classification model that uses both internal data and expert judgement, as well as information on similar exposure types from other asset classes.
8

EAD must be at least equal to the current utilisation of the balance at account level
Institutions
15.1
PD
1

A statistical model that combines quantitative analysis on financial information with expert inputs and macroeconomic factors.
10

PD > 0.03%
LGD
1

A quantitative model that produces both downturn and expected LGD. Several securities types are included in the model to recognise collateral in the LGD calculation. For unsecured LGD, a floor of 45% is applied.
10

45%
EAD
1

A quantitative model that assigns credit conversion factors (‘CCF’) taking into account product types and committed/uncommitted indicator to calculate EAD using current utilisation and available headroom.
10

EAD must be at least equal to the current utilisation of the balance at account level
Corporates¹
317.6
 
 
 
 
 
Global large corporates
 
PD
1

A statistical model built on 15 years of data. The model uses financial information, macroeconomic information and market-driven data, and is complemented by a qualitative assessment.
15

PD > 0.03%
Other regional / local corporates
 
PD
11

Corporates that fall below the global large corporate threshold are rated through regional/local PD models, which reflect regional/local circumstances. These models use financial information, behavioural data and qualitative information to derive a statistically built PD.
>10


Non-bank financial institutions
 
PD
10

Predominantly statistical models that combines quantitative analysis on financial information with expert inputs.
10

PD > 0.03%
All corporates
 
LGD
7

Regional/local statistical models covering all corporates, including global large corporates, developed using historical loss/recovery data and various data inputs, including collateral information, customer type and geography.
>7

UK 45%
 
 
EAD
5

Regional/local statistical models covering all corporates, including global large corporates, developed using historical utilisation information and various data inputs, including product type and geography.
>7

EAD must be at least equal to the current utilisation of the balance at account level
1
Excludes specialised lending exposures subject to supervisory slotting approach (see table 56a&b).



40
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Table 30: IRB models – estimated and actual values (wholesale)¹
 
 
 
PD2
LGD3
EAD4
 
 
 
Estimated

Actuals

Estimated5

Actuals5

Estimated

Actuals

 
 
Footnotes
%

%

%

%

%

%

 
2016
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
– Sovereigns model
6
3.43


45.00




 
– Banks model
 
1.63






 
– Corporates models
7
1.79

1.23

37.71

29.43

0.91

0.76

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2015
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
– Sovereigns model
6
1.72

1.12

45.00


0.07


 
– Banks model
 
2.22






 
– Corporates models
7
1.89

1.26

37.74

21.52

0.60

0.55

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2014
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
– Sovereigns model
6
2.27






 
– Banks model
 
3.28






 
– Corporates models
7
1.88

1.16

36.83

16.06

0.47

0.34

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2013
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
– Sovereigns model
6
4.14






 
– Banks model
 
3.18

0.20

40.01


0.06

0.04

 
– Corporates models
7
2.63

1.20

33.09

18.69

0.54

0.48

1
Data represents an annual view, analysed at 30 September.
2
Estimated PD for all models is average PD calculated on the number of obligors covered by the model(s).
3
Average LGD values are EAD-weighted.
4
Expressed as a percentage of total EAD, which includes all defaulted and non-defaulted exposures for the relevant population.
5
For sovereigns and banks models, estimated and actual LGD represents the average LGD for customers that defaulted in the year. For corporates models, they represent the average LGD for customers that have defaulted and been resolved in the period.
6
For 2016, 2015 and 2014, the estimated PD excludes inactive sovereign obligors.
7
Covers the combined populations of the global large corporates model, all regional IRB models for large, medium and small corporates and non-bank financial institutions. For 2016, 2015 and 2014, the estimated and observed PDs were calculated only for unique obligors.
Table 31: IRB models – corporate PD models – performance by CRR grade
 
 
Corporates1
 
 
Facility2

Defaulted3

Estimated PD4
Actual PD5

Diff. in PD

Actual PD5
Footnotes
   %

   %

   %
   %

   %

2016
 
 
 
 
 
 
CRR 0.1
6


0.01

0.01
CRR 1.1
 
3.88

0.02

0.02
CRR 1.2
 
6.05

0.04

0.04
CRR 2.1
 
17.51

0.07

0.07
CRR 2.2
 
15.05
0.01
0.13
0.03
0.10
CRR 3.1
 
11.22
1.03
0.22
0.25
(0.03
)
CRR 3.2
 
10.67
0.26
0.37
0.36
0.01
CRR 3.3
 
9.21
0.26
0.63
0.49
0.14
CRR 4.1
 
6.46
0.78
0.87
0.79
0.08
CRR 4.2
 
5.49
0.47
1.20
0.64
0.56
CRR 4.3
 
4.59
1.18
1.65
1.46
0.19
CRR 5.1
 
4.08
1.31
2.25
1.41
0.84
CRR 5.2
 
2.11
1.40
3.05
1.89
1.16
CRR 5.3
 
1.76
1.96
4.20
2.27
1.93
CRR 6.1
 
0.98
10.15
5.75
5.57
0.18
CRR 6.2
 
0.38
15.38
7.85
4.68
3.17
CRR 7.1
 
0.27
14.29
10.00
9.46
0.54
CRR 7.2
 
0.09
12.38
13.00
6.63
6.37
CRR 8.1
 
0.10
48.22
19.00
13.11
5.89
CRR 8.2
 
0.07
47.10
36.00
20.29
15.71
CRR 8.3
 
0.03
36.10
75.00
17.83
57.17
Total
 
100.00
 
 
 
 

HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
41


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 31: IRB models – corporate PD models – performance by CRR grade (continued)
 
 
Corporates1
 
 
Facility2

Defaulted3

Estimated PD4
Actual PD5

   Diff. in PD

 
Footnotes
   %

   %

   %
   %

   %

2015
 
 
 
 
 
 
CRR 0.1
6


0.01

0.01

CRR 1.1
 
5.72


0.02

0.02

CRR 1.2
 
5.25


0.04

0.04

CRR 2.1
 
16.48


0.07

0.07

CRR 2.2
 
14.17


0.13
0.01

0.12

CRR 3.1
 
11.92

0.17

0.22
0.15

0.07

CRR 3.2
 
11.00

0.10

0.37
0.30

0.07

CRR 3.3
 
9.35

0.14

0.63
0.47

0.16

CRR 4.1
 
6.52

0.64

0.87
0.97

(0.10
)
CRR 4.2
 
5.07

0.45

1.20
1.06

0.14

CRR 4.3
 
4.38

0.62

1.65
1.55

0.10

CRR 5.1
 
3.52

0.99

2.25
1.24

1.01

CRR 5.2
 
2.19

0.61

3.05
1.44

1.61

CRR 5.3
 
2.24

1.74

4.20
1.89

2.31

CRR 6.1
 
0.89

4.66

5.75
5.05

0.70

CRR 6.2
 
0.66

3.58

7.85
6.46

1.39

CRR 7.1
 
0.31

10.79

10.00
7.13

2.87

CRR 7.2
 
0.09

7.27

13.00
9.48

3.52

CRR 8.1
 
0.14

11.33

19.00
11.11

7.89

CRR 8.2
 
0.07

16.97

36.00
23.61

12.39

CRR 8.3
 
0.03

16.66

75.00
17.10

57.90

Total
 
100.00

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2014
 
 
 
 
 
 
CRR 0.1
6
0.01


0.01

0.01

CRR 1.1
 
6.32


0.02

0.02

CRR 1.2
 
6.68


0.04

0.04

CRR 2.1
 
16.71

0.01

0.07
0.04

0.03

CRR 2.2
 
13.07


0.13

0.13

CRR 3.1
 
10.38

0.06

0.22
0.10

0.12

CRR 3.2
 
12.50

0.11

0.37
0.23

0.14

CRR 3.3
 
6.62

0.25

0.63
0.54

0.09

CRR 4.1
 
10.41

0.28

0.87
0.54

0.33

CRR 4.2
 
4.12

0.79

1.20
0.81

0.39

CRR 4.3
 
3.49

0.83

1.65
0.91

0.74

CRR 5.1
 
2.50

0.53

2.25
0.97

1.28

CRR 5.2
 
2.09

0.54

3.05
1.24

1.81

CRR 5.3
 
1.47

1.74

4.20
2.70

1.50

CRR 6.1
 
0.59

3.02

5.75
4.11

1.64

CRR 6.2
 
0.30

1.12

7.85
4.27

3.58

CRR 7.1
 
0.29

14.59

10.00
11.35

(1.35
)
CRR 7.2
 
0.08

2.78

13.00
10.11

2.89

CRR 8.1
 
2.31

1.17

19.00
13.77

5.23

CRR 8.2
 
0.04

32.32

36.00
22.33

13.67

CRR 8.3
 
0.02

4.85

75.00
14.89

60.11

Total
 
100.0

 
 
 
 

42
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 31: IRB models – corporate PD models – performance by CRR grade (continued)
 
 
Corporates1
 
 
Facility2

Defaulted3

Estimated PD4
Actual PD5

Diff. in PD
 
Footnote
   %

   %

   %
   %

   %
2013
 
 
 
 
 
 
CRR 0.1
6


0.01

0.01
CRR 1.1
 
4.83


0.02

0.02
CRR 1.2
 
7.47


0.04

0.04
CRR 2.1
 
20.85


0.07

0.07
CRR 2.2
 
10.38

0.01

0.13
0.03

0.10
CRR 3.1
 
10.79

0.07

0.22
0.16

0.06
CRR 3.2
 
9.49

0.13

0.37
0.22

0.15
CRR 3.3
 
8.33

0.15

0.63
0.27

0.36
CRR 4.1
 
6.40

0.35

0.87
0.48

0.39
CRR 4.2
 
5.84

0.93

1.20
0.80

0.40
CRR 4.3
 
4.22

0.47

1.65
0.67

0.98
CRR 5.1
 
4.18

0.72

2.25
0.76

1.49
CRR 5.2
 
3.07

0.97

3.05
1.03

2.02
CRR 5.3
 
1.85

2.77

4.20
1.89

2.31
CRR 6.1
 
0.98

4.37

5.75
3.28

2.47
CRR 6.2
 
0.46

5.74

7.85
3.77

4.08
CRR 7.1
 
0.44

12.69

10.00
7.95

2.05
CRR 7.2
 
0.15

7.84

13.00
8.68

4.32
CRR 8.1
 
0.15

9.48

19.00
11.44

7.56
CRR 8.2
 
0.07

14.94

36.00
13.70

22.30
CRR 8.3
 
0.05

13.12

75.00
13.64

61.36
Total
 
100.0

 
 
 
 
1
Covers the combined populations of the global large corporates model, all regional IRB models for large, medium and small corporates and non-bank financial institutions.
2
Total facility limits for each CRR grade, expressed as a percentage of total limits granted.
3
Defaulted facilities as a percentage of total facility limits at that grade.
4
The estimated PD is before application of the 0.03% regulatory floor.
5
Actual PD is based on the number of defaulted obligors covered by the model(s), without taking into account the size of the facility granted or the exposures to the obligor.
6
The top band of the wholesale CRR master scale is not available to entities in the corporates exposure class, but restricted to the strongest central governments, central banks and institutions.
Retail risk
Retail risk rating systems
Due to the different country-level portfolio performance characteristics and loss history, there are no global models for our retail portfolios. Across the Group, over 120 models are used with the PRA’s approval under our IRB permission.
The 10 most material risk rating systems for which we disclose details of modelling methodology and performance data represent RWAs of approximately $35bn or 54% of the total retail IRB RWA.
PD models are developed using statistical estimation based on a minimum of five years of historical data. The modelling approach is typically inherently TTC or, where models are developed based on a PIT approach, as in the UK, the model outputs become effectively TTC through the application of buffer or model adjustments as agreed with the PRA.
 

EAD models are also developed using at least five years of historical observations and typically adopt one of two approaches:
closed-end products without the facility for additional drawdowns, EAD is estimated as the outstanding balance of accounts at the time of observation; or
EAD for products with the facility for additional drawdowns is estimated as the outstanding balance of accounts at the time of observation plus a credit conversion factor applied to the undrawn portion of the facility.
LGD estimates have more variation, particularly in respect of the time period that is used to quantify economic downturn assumptions.


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
43


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 32: Material retail IRB risk rating systems
Portfolio
CRD IV asset
class
RWA
$bn
Component model
Number of material component models
Model description and methodology
Number of years loss
data1
Applicable Pillar 1 regulatory thresholds and overlays
UK HSBC
residential
mortgages
Retail
– secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
3.70
PD
1
Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information. Underlying PiT model is calibrated to the latest observed PD. An adjustment is then applied to generate the long-run PD based on a combination of historical misalignment of the underlying model and expert judgement.
7–10
PD floor of 0.03%
LGD
1
Statistical estimates of loss and probability of possession in combination with the workout process and using the 1990s recession in benchmarking the downturn LGD.
> 10
LGD floor of 10% at portfolio level
EAD
1
Logical model that uses the sum of balance at observation plus further unpaid interest that could accrue before default.
7–10
EAD must at least be equal to current balance
UK HSBC
credit cards
Retail
– qualifying revolving
1.68
PD
1
Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information. Underlying PiT model is calibrated to the latest observed PD. An adjustment is then applied to generate the long run PD based on historical observed misalignment of the underlying model.
7–10
PD floor of 0.03%
LGD
1
Statistical model based on forecasting the amount of expected future recoveries, segmented by default status.
7–10

EAD
1
Statistical model that directly estimates EAD for different segments of the portfolio using either balance or limit as the key input.
7–10
EAD must at least be equal to current balance
UK HSBC
personal loans
Retail
– other non-SME
2.70
PD
1
Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information. Underlying PiT model is calibrated to the latest observed PD. An adjustment is then applied to generate the long run PD based on historical observed misalignment of the underlying model.
7–10
PD floor of 0.03%
LGD
1
Statistical model based on forecasting the amount of expected future recoveries, segmented by default status.
7–10

EAD
1
EAD is equal to current balance as this provides a conservative estimate.
7–10
EAD must at least be equal to current balance
UK business banking
Retail
– other SME
3.75
PD
1
Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information. Underlying PiT model is calibrated to the latest observed PD. An adjustment is then applied to generate the long run PD based on historical observed misalignment of the underlying model.
7–10
PD floor of 0.03%
LGD
2
Two sets of models – one for secured and another for unsecured exposures. The secured model uses the value to loan as a key component for estimation and the unsecured model estimates the amount of future recoveries and undrawn portion.
7–10

EAD
1
Statistical model using segmentation according to limit and utilisation and estimation of the undrawn exposure.
7–10
EAD must at least be equal to current balance
Hong Kong
HSBC personal residential mortgages
2
Retail
– secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
6.71
PD
2
Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information, and calibrated to a long-run default rate.
> 10
PD floor of 0.03%
LGD
2
Statistical model based on estimate of loss incurred over a recovery period derived from historical data with downturn LGD based on the worst observed default rate.
> 10
LGD floor of 10% at portfolio level
EAD
2
Rule-based calculation based on current balance which continues to be a conservative estimate for EAD.
> 10
EAD must at least be equal to current balance

44
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 32: Material retail IRB risk rating systems
Portfolio
CRD IV asset
class
RWA
$bn
Component model
Number of material component models
Model description and methodology
Number of years loss
data1
Applicable Pillar 1 regulatory thresholds and overlays
Hong Kong
HSBC credit
cards
Retail
– qualifying revolving
3.25
PD
1
Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information, and calibrated to a long-run default rate.
> 10
PD floor of 0.03%
LGD
1
Statistical model based on forecasting the amount of expected losses. Downturn LGD derived using data from the period with the highest default rate.
> 10

EAD
1
Statistical model which derives a credit utilisation which is used to determine the EAD.
> 10
EAD must at least be equal to current balance
Hong Kong
HSBC personal instalment loans
Retail
– other non-SME
1.44
PD
1
Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information, and calibrated to a long-run default rate.
> 10
PD floor of 0.03%
LGD
1
Statistical model based on forecasting the amount of expected future losses. Downturn LGD derived using data from the period with the highest default rate.
> 10
 
EAD
1
Statistical model which derives a credit conversion factor to determine the proportion of undrawn limit to be added to the balance at observation.
> 10
EAD must at least be equal to current balance
US Consumer
Lending first lien
3
Retail
– secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
5.02
PD
1
Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information, and calibrated to a long-run default rate.
> 10
PD floor of 0.03%
LGD
1
Statistical model based on identifying the main risk drivers of loss and recovery and grouping them into homogeneous pools. Downturn LGD is derived based on the peak default rate observed while additional assumptions and estimations are made on incomplete workouts.
> 10
LGD floor of 10% at portfolio level;
10% uplift on the total LGD for first lien portfolio;
LGD floor at the segment level based on the value notified to the PRA and ranges from circa 60% to circa 98%
EAD
1
Rule-based calculation based on current balance that continues to be a conservative estimate for EAD.
> 10
EAD must at least be equal to current balance
US Mortgage Services first lien3
Retail
– secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
1.80
PD
1
Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information, and calibrated to a long-run default rate.
> 10
PD floor of 0.03%
LGD
1
Statistical model based on identifying the main risk drivers of loss and recovery and grouping them into homogeneous pools. Downturn LGD is derived based on the peak default rate observed while additional assumptions and estimations are made on incomplete workouts.
> 10
LGD floor of 10% at portfolio level;
10% uplift on the total LGD for first lien portfolio;
LGD floor at the segment level based on the value notified to the PRA and ranges from circa 60% to circa 98%
EAD
1
Rule-based calculation based on current balance which continues to be a conservative estimate for EAD.
> 10
EAD must at least be equal to current balance

HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
45


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 32: Material retail IRB risk rating systems
Portfolio
CRD IV asset
class
RWA
$bn
Component model
Number of material component models
Model description and methodology
Number of years loss
data1
Applicable Pillar 1 regulatory thresholds and overlays
US HSBC Mortgage Corporation
first lien
3
Retail
– secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
5.31
PD
1
Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information, and calibrated to a long-run default rate.
> 10
PD floor of 0.03%
LGD
1
Statistical model based on identifying the main risk drivers of loss and recovery and grouping them into homogeneous pools. Downturn LGD is derived based on the peak default rate observed. Additional assumptions and estimations are made on incomplete workouts.
> 10
LGD floor of 10% at portfolio level
EAD
1
Rule-based calculation based on current balance that continues to be a conservative estimate for EAD.
> 10
EAD must at least be equal to current balance
1
Defined as the number of years of historical data used in model development and estimation.
2
In 2016, the Hong Kong Monetary Authority (‘HKMA’) extended a 15% risk weight floor to all residential mortgages.
3
In US mortgage business, first lien is a primary claim on a property that takes precedence over all subsequent claims and will be paid first from the proceeds in case of the property’s foreclosure sale.
Within table 33, the RWAs and other metrics have decreased in 2016 in the UK and the US due to the increasing house prices in most regions of the UK and the continued sale of assets and improving house prices in the US. The extension of the
 
risk-weight floor to 15% for all residential mortgages in June 2016, not just those granted after 22 February 2013, increased the RWAs and RWA density in Hong Kong.

Table 33: Retail IRB exposures secured by mortgages on immovable property (non-SME)
 
Exposure
value

Average
PD

Average
LGD

RWA
density

RWAs

 
$bn

%

%

%

$bn

At 31 Dec 2016
 
 
 
 
 
Total Retail IRB exposures secured by mortgages on immovable property (non-SME)
249.0

2.14

16.6

15

36.5

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
UK HSBC residential mortgages
83.4

1.30

10.9

4

3.7

Hong Kong residential mortgages
62.4

0.70

10.0

17

10.6

US first lien residential mortgages
19.8

12.20

58.5

61

12.1

 
 
 
 
 
 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
 
 
 
Total Retail IRB exposures secured by mortgages on immovable property (non-SME)
275.4

2.78

18.1

22

60.0

– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
UK HSBC residential mortgages
94.0

1.49

11.1

5

5.0

Hong Kong residential mortgages
60.4

0.76

10.0

15

9.0

US first lien residential mortgages
34.2

12.66

52.0

112

38.2


Retail credit models
Given the large number of retail IRB models globally, we disclose information on our most material local models.
The actual and estimated values are derived from the model monitoring and calibration processes performed at a local level. Within the discipline of our global modelling policies, our analytics teams adopt back-testing criteria specific to local conditions in order to assess the accuracy of their models.
Table 34 contains the estimated and actual values from the back-testing of our material IRB models covering the HSBC brand portfolios in the UK, the HSBC portfolios in Hong Kong and the residential mortgage portfolios in the US.
The PD, LGD and EAD estimated values here were calculated to compare with the reported actual values and have a different basis of preparation to the estimates reported in table 33.
Within table 34, for back-testing purposes, a customer’s PD is observed at a PIT and their default or non-default status in the following one-year period is recorded against that PD grade. The PD presentation here is expressed on an obligor count basis consisting of non-defaulted obligors at the time of observation. The LGD and EAD refer to observations for the defaulted population, being the appropriate focus of an assessment of these models’ performance. The LGD values represent the amount of loss as a percentage of EAD, and are calculated based on defaulted accounts that were fully resolved or have
 
completed the modelled recovery outcome period at the reporting date. The EAD values of the defaulted exposures are presented as a percentage of the total EAD, which includes all defaulted and non-defaulted exposures for the relevant population. The regulatory PD and LGD floors of 0.03% and 10%, respectively, are applied during final capital calculation and are not reflected in the estimates below.
For our UK HSBC residential mortgage portfolio, the estimated values in table 34 for 2016 are based on a different default criteria than in 2015. The inclusion of additional forbearance criteria and specific provisions being raised as default events has resulted in higher PD estimates and lower LGD estimates. The model outputs include required regulatory downturn adjustments. In conducting the back-testing, our UK HSBC residential mortgage LGD model uses a recovery outcome period of 24 months starting at the date of default. Actual LGD values decreased as a result of a higher proportion of defaulted loans resulting in no loss and improving house prices in most regions of the UK. Overall, UK estimates in table 34 remain higher than calculated actual values.
The Hong Kong estimated PD and LGD values in table 34 include required stressed factors to reflect downturn conditions. The LGD model for our Hong Kong HSBC residential mortgage portfolio uses a recovery outcome period of 24 months starting at the date of default. The estimates for our Hong Kong HSBC residential mortgage LGD remain higher than the calculated actual values but below the 10% regulatory floor. The Hong


46
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Kong credit card EAD model currently underestimates exposure values at the point of default; however, this is mitigated by a temporary adjustment to RWAs. An updated model has been submitted to the local regulator for approval and is expected to be implemented during 2017.
The US estimates in table 34 include downturn adjustments and model overlays agreed with the PRA. The LGD models for our Consumer Lending and Mortgage Services portfolios use a recovery outcome period of 30 months, and for HSBC Mortgage Corporation portfolio 36 months, reflecting the longer recovery process due to foreclosure moratoria.
 
The LGD estimates and actual LGD values for our Consumer Lending and Mortgage Services portfolios remained stable in 2016.
For the HSBC Mortgage Corporation portfolio, new models were implemented in 2016 following approval from the PRA. The new models provide a better assessment of risk for the current loan profile and address the underestimation of loss inherent in the previous LGD model. Actual LGD values decreased due to improving house prices.

Table 34: IRB models – estimated and actual values (retail)
 
PD
LGD
EAD
 
Estimated

Actuals

Estimated

Actuals

Estimated

Actuals

 
%

%

%

%

%

%

2016
 
 
 
 
 
 
UK
 
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC residential mortgage
0.50

0.35

10.53

1.09

0.34

0.31

HSBC credit card
0.89

0.75

91.72

89.92

1.03

1.00

HSBC personal loans
1.84

1.52

88.26

79.08

1.36

1.29

Business Banking (Retail SME)
2.40

2.47

93.56

82.63

1.80

1.64

Hong Kong
 
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC personal residential mortgage
0.79

0.04

4.52

0.97

0.04

0.03

HSBC credit card
0.69

0.30

88.97

82.48

0.52

0.56

HSBC personal instalment loans
2.46

1.78

89.28

69.62

1.44

1.33

US
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consumer Lending real estate first lien
5.30

4.29

74.22

51.89

3.53

3.49

Mortgage Services real estate first lien
6.16

3.77

68.26

51.79

3.37

3.34

HSBC Mortgage Corporation first lien
2.20

1.27

41.18

29.25

0.50

0.50

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2015
 
 
 
 
 
 
UK
 
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC residential mortgage
0.45

0.22

16.43

3.54

0.17

0.17

HSBC credit card
1.06

0.86

91.54

88.42

1.23

1.19

HSBC personal loans
1.93

1.23

82.10

78.46

1.18

1.13

Business Banking (Retail SME)
2.26

2.21

76.06

71.78

1.57

1.47

Hong Kong
 
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC personal residential mortgage
0.79

0.03

1.90

0.03

0.04

0.03

HSBC credit card
0.67

0.32

90.40

81.75

0.52

0.58

HSBC personal instalment loans
2.40

2.02

89.43

69.59

1.69

1.51

US
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consumer Lending real estate first lien
5.92

5.47

75.98

51.60

5.37

5.31

Mortgage Services real estate first lien
6.96

5.96

69.59

54.09

7.97

7.88

HSBC Mortgage Corporation first lien
4.66

2.08

29.63

37.19

0.70

0.69

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2014
 
 
 
 
 
 
UK
 
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC residential mortgage
0.50

0.31

15.82

4.68

0.24

0.23

HSBC credit card
1.37

1.07

91.11

86.30

1.83

1.78

HSBC personal loans
2.28

1.57

81.56

80.45

1.52

1.46

Business Banking (Retail SME)
2.83

2.57

73.04

68.17

2.00

1.88

Hong Kong
 
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC personal residential mortgage
0.72

0.04

1.26

0.35

0.03

0.03

HSBC credit card
0.62

0.32

92.91

88.13

0.55

0.59

HSBC personal instalment loans
2.37

2.04

89.69

87.66

1.77

1.63

US
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consumer Lending real estate first lien
7.31

7.72

77.16

60.29

7.83

7.72

Mortgage Services real estate first lien
9.43

8.12

71.40

60.17

7.51

7.43

HSBC Mortgage Corporation first lien
5.24

2.28

29.63

39.36

1.00

1.00


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
47


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 34: IRB models – estimated and actual values (retail) (continued)
 
PD
LGD
EAD
 
Estimated

Actuals

Estimated

Actuals

Estimated

Actuals

 
%

%

%

%

%

%

2013
 
 
 
 
 
 
UK
 
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC residential mortgage
0.55

0.38

17.30

6.40

0.32

0.31

HSBC credit card
1.54

1.27

88.10

84.10

1.70

1.67

HSBC personal loans
3.57

2.35

85.40

73.00

2.19

2.11

Business Banking (Retail SME)
2.39

2.61

78.00

70.00

2.03

1.99

Hong Kong
 
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC personal residential mortgage
0.71

0.03

1.84

0.43

0.03

0.03

HSBC credit card
0.63

0.33

91.41

84.58

0.56

0.59

HSBC personal instalment loans
2.20

1.99

90.07

96.16

1.69

1.55

US
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consumer Lending real estate first lien
7.74

8.22

67.13

64.93

7.08

6.72

Mortgage Services real estate first lien
10.15

9.68

60.04

62.92

6.12

5.88

HSBC Mortgage Corporation first lien
4.64

4.43

49.85

37.17

2.40

2.40

Model performance
Model validation is subject to global internal standards. The standards are designed to support a comprehensive quantitative and qualitative process within a cycle of model monitoring and validation that includes:
investigation of model stability;
model performance measured through testing the model’s outputs against actual outcomes; and
model use within the business, e.g. user input data quality, override activity and the assessment of results from key controls around the usage of the rating system as a whole within the overall credit process.
 

Models are validated against a series of metrics and triggers approved by the appropriate governance committee.
A large number of models are used within the Group, and data at individual model level is, in most cases, immaterial in the context of the overall Group. We therefore disclose data covering most wholesale models, including corporate models on an aggregated basis, and on the most material retail models.
Tables 35 and 36 below validate the reliability of PD calculations by comparing the PD used in IRB calculations with actual default experience.
Our Retail PD models are generally conservative. However, in the case of mortgages, the sale of assets over recent years for our US Consumer Lending and Mortgage Services portfolios means that the average historical annual default rate is based on a different profile of loans than current PD estimates.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Table 35: Wholesale IRB exposure – Back-testing of probability of default (PD) per portfolio¹
 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
 
Sovereigns
PD range
External rating equivalent (S&P)
External rating equivalent (Moody’s)
External rating equivalent (Fitch)
Weighted average PD %
Arithmetic average PD by obligors %
Number of obligors
Defaulted obligors in the year

of which: new defaulted obligors in the year

Average historical annual default rate %
 
End of previous year

End of the year

 
 
0.00 to <0.15
AAA to A-
Aaa to Baa1
AAA to BBB+
0.02
0.05
60

60



 
 
0.15 to <0.25
BBB+
Baa2
BBB
0.22
0.22
8

11



 
 
0.25 to <0.50
BBB
Baa3
BBB-
0.37
0.37
10

7



 
 
0.50 to <0.75
BBB-
Baa3
BBB-
0.63
0.63
7

7



 
 
0.75 to <2.50
BB+ to BB-
Ba1 to B1
BB+ to B+
2.01
1.58
19

25



 
 
2.5 to <10.00
B+ to B-
B2 to Caa1
B to CCC+
4.66
5.32
35

27



 
 
10.00 to <100.00
CCC+ to C
Caa1 to C
CCC to C
20.27
21.07
14

16



1.67
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Banks
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
0.00 to <0.15
AAA to A-
Aaa to Baa1
AAA to BBB+
0.05
0.08
235

250



 
0.15 to <0.25
BBB+
Baa2
BBB
0.22
0.22
91

72



 
0.25 to <0.50
BBB
Baa3
BBB-
0.37
0.37
37

59



 
0.50 to <0.75
BBB-
Baa3
BBB-
0.63
0.63
64

68



 
0.75 to <2.50
BB+ to BB-
Ba1 to B1
BB+ to B+
1.16
1.36
139

122



 
2.5 to <10.00
B+ to B-
B2 to Caa1
B to CCC+
4.96
4.87
109

100



0.29
 
10.00 to <100.00
CCC+ to C
Caa1 to C
CCC to C
11.38
11.55
29

32



1.70

48
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Corporates
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
0.00 to <0.15
AAA to A-
Aaa to Baa1
AAA to BBB+
0.09
0.10
11,742

11,245

2


0.01
 
0.15 to <0.25
BBB+
Baa2
BBB
0.22
0.22
11,003

10,904

28

1

0.13
 
0.25 to <0.50
BBB
Baa3
BBB-
0.37
0.37
12,384

12,183

48

1

0.28
 
0.50 to <0.75
BBB-
Baa3
BBB-
0.63
0.63
10,516

10,924

54

2

0.50
 
0.75 to <2.50
BB+ to BB-
Ba1 to B1
BB+ to B+
1.39
1.47
36,308

35,588

416

31

1.03
 
2.5 to <10.00
B+ to B-
B2 to Caa1
B to CCC+
4.39
4.43
13,419

13,488

437

21

3.06
 
10.00 to <100.00
CCC+ to C
Caa1 to C
CCC to C
19.08
20.29
2,319

2,141

285

12

13.42
1
Data represents an annual view, analysed at 30 September.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Table 36: Retail IRB exposure – Back-testing of probability of default (PD) per portfolio¹
 
a
b
d
e
f
g
h
i
 
Retail – Secured by real estate non-SME
PD range
Weighted average PD

Arithmetic average PD by obligors

Number of obligors
Defaulted obligors in the year

of which: new defaulted obligors in the year

Average historical annual default rate

 
End of previous year

End of the year

 

0.00 to < 0.15
0.06

0.06

454,384

472,033

196

3

0.03

 

0.15 to < 0.25
0.20

0.19

42,290

40,896

37


0.07

 

0.25 to < 0.50
0.39

0.40

78,127

76,119

154


0.28

 

0.50 to < 0.75
0.59

0.59

16,323

16,596

22


0.10

 

0.75 to < 2.50
1.27

1.32

105,008

70,068

967

2

1.10

 

2.50 to < 10.00
4.83

4.74

52,157

25,774

739

12

3.68

 

10.00 to < 100.00
28.19

27.67

55,403

11,411

2,873

152

33.03

a
b
d
e
f
g
h
i
Retail – qualifying revolving
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

0.00 to < 0.15
0.07

0.07

3,081,238

3,212,010

1,556

94

0.05


0.15 to < 0.25
0.19

0.20

739,131

686,815

661

15

0.10


0.25 to < 0.50
0.36

0.35

577,288

601,986

1,265

18

0.19


0.50 to < 0.75
0.61

0.62

291,303

301,068

1,060

15

0.33


0.75 to < 2.50
1.35

1.33

649,838

657,683

5,519

80

0.79


2.50 to < 10.00
4.42

4.30

180,889

184,846

5,739

29

2.87


10.00 to < 100.00
25.88

28.08

62,487

46,776

14,159

2

18.71

a
b
d
e
f
g
h
i
Retail – other non-SME
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

0.00 to < 0.15
0.09

0.09

113,178

150,991

142

6

0.13


0.15 to < 0.25
0.19

0.19

70,557

82,256

91

3

0.13


0.25 to < 0.50
0.34

0.36

135,970

149,246

339

65

0.28


0.50 to < 0.75
0.60

0.60

67,774

67,475

313

29

0.53


0.75 to < 2.50
1.36

1.37

146,702

145,343

1,171

122

1.14


2.50 to < 10.00
4.57

4.91

67,842

59,099

1,584

93

3.20


10.00 to < 100.00
25.26

26.44

20,318

12,085

3,722

9

19.94

a
b
d
e
f
g
h
i
Retail – other SME
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

0.00 to < 0.15
0.10

0.09

119,633

119,245

142

1

0.09


0.15 to < 0.25
0.20

0.20

72,127

79,047

239

4

0.27


0.25 to < 0.50
0.37

0.37

150,563

163,934

737

26

0.49


0.50 to < 0.75
0.60

0.60

124,371

124,797

998

22

0.84


0.75 to < 2.50
1.54

1.38

275,325

262,619

4,569

117

1.66


2.50 to < 10.00
4.81

4.73

155,368

133,616

6,953

62

4.27


10.00 to < 100.00
18.06

20.84

38,418

26,680

6,982

22

16.62

1
Data represents an annual view, analysed at 30 September.



HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
49


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Counterparty credit risk
Counterparty credit risk management
CCR risk arises for derivatives and SFTs. It is calculated in both the trading and non-trading books, and is the risk that a counterparty may default before settlement of the transaction. CCR is generated primarily in our wholesale global businesses.
Three approaches may be used under CRD IV to calculate exposure values for CCR: mark-to-market, standardised and IMM. Exposure values calculated under these approaches are used to determine RWAs. Across the Group, we use the mark-to-market and IMM approaches. Under the mark-to-market approach, the EAD is calculated as current exposure plus regulatory add-ons. We use this approach for all products not covered by our IMM permission. Under the IMM approach, EAD is calculated by multiplying the effective expected positive exposure with a multiplier called ‘alpha’.
Alpha (set to a default value of 1.4) accounts for several portfolio features that increase EL above that indicated by effective expected positive exposure in the event of default:
co-variance of exposures;
correlation between exposures and default;
level of volatility/correlation that might coincide with a downturn;
concentration risk; and
model risk.
The effective expected exposure is derived from simulation, pricing and aggregation internal models approved by regulators. The IMM model is subject to ongoing model validation including monthly model performance monitoring. The only IMM site is London where approximately 91% of the trade population falls under the IMM approach.
From a risk management perspective, including daily monitoring of credit limit utilisation, products not covered by IMM are subject to conservative asset class add-on calculated or Repo VaR outside of the IMM framework.
The potential future exposure (‘PFE’) measures used for CCR management are calibrated to the 95th percentile. The measures consider volatility, trade maturity and the counterparty legal documentation covering netting and collateral.
Limits for CCR exposures are assigned within the overall credit process. The Credit Risk function assigns a limit against each counterparty to cover derivatives exposure which may arise as a result of a counterparty default. The magnitude of this limit will depend on the overall risk appetite and type of derivatives trading undertaken with the counterparty.
The models and methodologies used in the calculation of CCR are approved by the Markets MOC. Models are subject to ongoing monitoring and validation. Additionally, they are subject to independent review at inception and annually thereafter.
 
Credit valuation adjustment
CRD IV introduced a regulatory capital charge to cover Credit valuation adjustment (‘CVA’) risk, the risk of adverse moves in the credit valuation adjustments taken for expected credit losses on derivative transactions. Where we have both specific risk VaR approval and IMM approval for a product, the CVA VaR approach has been used to calculate the CVA capital charge. Where we do not hold both approvals, the standardised approach has been applied. Certain counterparty exposures are exempt from CVA, such as non-financial counterparties and sovereigns.
Collateral arrangements
Our policy is to revalue all traded transactions and associated collateral positions on a daily basis. An independent collateral management function manages the collateral process including pledging and receiving collateral and investigating disputes and non-receipts.
Eligible collateral types are controlled under a policy to ensure price transparency, price stability, liquidity, enforceability, independence, reusability and eligibility for regulatory purposes. A valuation ‘haircut’ policy reflects the fact that collateral may fall in value between the date the collateral was called and the date of liquidation or enforcement. At least 96% of collateral held as credit risk mitigation under CSAs is either cash or liquid government securities.
Further information on gross fair value exposure and the offset due to legally enforceable netting and collateral is set out on page 284 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Credit ratings downgrade
A credit rating downgrade clause in a Master Agreement or a credit rating downgrade threshold clause in a CSA is designed to trigger an action if the credit rating of the affected party falls below a specified level. These actions may include the requirement to pay or increase collateral, the termination of transactions by the non-affected party or the assignment of transactions by the affected party.
At 31 December 2016, the potential value of the additional collateral pertaining to International Swaps and Derivatives Association CSA downgrade thresholds that we would need to post with counterparties in the event of a one-notch downgrade of our rating was $0.3bn (2015: $0.3bn) and for a two-notch downgrade was $0.8bn (2015: $0.5bn).


50
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Counterparty credit risk exposures
 
Table 37: Counterparty credit risk exposure – by exposure class, product and geographical region
 
 
 
Exposure value
 
 
 
Europe

Asia

MENA

North
America

Latin
America

Total

 
 
 
Footnotes
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 
By exposure class
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
IRB advanced approach
 
62.3

36.1

0.5

22.0

0.7

121.6

 
– central governments and central banks
 
5.0

4.1


3.0

0.2

12.3

 
– institutions
 
27.9

19.8

0.2

9.2

0.4

57.5

 
– corporates
 
29.4

12.2

0.3

9.8

0.1

51.8

 
IRB foundation approach
 
5.0


0.5



5.5

 
– corporates
 
5.0


0.5



5.5

 
Standardised approach
 
6.5

0.7

2.1

0.1

0.7

10.1

 
– central governments and central banks
 
5.9


1.4



7.3

 
– institutions
 


0.2



0.2

 
– corporates
 
0.6

0.7

0.5

0.1

0.7

2.6

 
CVA advanced
2






 
CVA standardised
2






 
CCP standardised
 
13.3

5.5


8.8


27.6

 
At 31 Dec 2016
 
87.1

42.3

3.1

30.9

1.4

164.8

 
By product
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Derivatives (OTC and Exchange traded derivatives)
 
58.9

33.8

1.6

21.5

1.2

117.0

 
SFTs
 
25.3

5.0

1.5

9.4

0.2

41.4

 
Other
1
2.9

3.5




6.4

 
CVA advanced
2






 
CVA standardised
2






 
CCP default funds
3






 
At 31 Dec 2016
 
87.1

42.3

3.1

30.9

1.4

164.8

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
By exposure class
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
IRB advanced approach
 
68.7

34.3

0.2

24.8

1.2

129.2

 
– central governments and central banks
 
4.9

3.8


4.3

0.3

13.3

 
– institutions
 
31.2

17.8

0.2

10.4

0.8

60.4

 
– corporates
 
32.6

12.7


10.1

0.1

55.5

 
IRB foundation approach
 
4.7


0.7



5.4

 
– corporates
 
4.7


0.7



5.4

 
Standardised approach
 
4.7

0.4

1.5

0.3

2.2

9.1

 
– central governments and central banks
 
4.1





4.1

 
– institutions
 


0.2

0.3


0.5

 
– corporates
 
0.6

0.4

1.3


2.2

4.5

 
CVA advanced
2






 
CVA standardised
2






 
CCP standardised
 
14.8

4.2


15.5

0.4

34.9

 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
92.9

38.9

2.4

40.6

3.8

178.6

 
By product
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Derivatives (OTC and Exchange traded derivatives)
 
60.9

31.2

2.3

28.8

3.4

126.6

 
SFTs
 
28.8

4.1

0.1

11.7

0.4

45.1

 
Other
1
3.2

3.6


0.1


6.9

 
CVA advanced
2






 
CVA standardised
2






 
CCP default funds
3






 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
92.9

38.9

2.4

40.6

3.8

178.6

1
Includes free deliveries not deducted from regulatory capital.
2
The RWA impact due to the CVA capital charge is calculated based on the same exposures as the IRB and standardised approaches. The table above does not present any exposures for CVA to avoid double counting.
3
Default fund contributions are cash balances posted to CCPs by all members. These cash balances have nil impact on reported exposure.

HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
51


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 38: Counterparty credit risk – RWAs by exposure class, product and geographical region
 
 
RWAs
 
 
Europe

Asia

MENA

North
America

Latin
America

Total

 
Footnotes
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

By exposure class
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
IRB advanced approach
 
21.3

11.2

0.2

8.6

0.3

41.6

– central governments and central banks
 
0.9

0.2


0.5

0.1

1.7

– institutions
 
8.1

5.2


2.6

0.1

16.0

– corporates
 
12.3

5.8

0.2

5.5

0.1

23.9

IRB foundation approach
 
1.7


0.2



1.9

– corporates
 
1.7


0.2



1.9

Standardised approach
 
0.8

0.7

0.6

0.1

0.6

2.8

– central governments and central banks
 






– institutions
 
0.1


0.1



0.2

– corporates
 
0.7

0.7

0.5

0.1

0.6

2.6

CVA advanced
2
3.5





3.5

CVA standardised
2
2.8

4.0

0.2

3.6

0.3

10.9

CCP standardised
 
0.7

0.3


0.3


1.3

At 31 Dec 2016
 
30.8

16.2

1.2

12.6

1.2

62.0

By product
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Derivatives (OTC and Exchange traded derivatives)
 
18.2

10.6

1.0

6.6

0.9

37.3

SFTs
 
4.5

0.6


2.1

0.1

7.3

Other
1
1.4

0.9




2.3

CVA advanced
2
3.5





3.5

CVA standardised
2
2.8

4.0

0.2

3.6

0.3

10.9

CCP default funds
3
0.4

0.1


0.2


0.7

At 31 Dec 2016
 
30.8

16.2

1.2

12.5

1.3

62.0

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
By exposure class
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
IRB advanced approach
 
22.0

12.3


9.5

0.9

44.7

– central governments and central banks
 
0.5

0.2


0.3

0.3

1.3

– institutions
 
7.8

4.5


3.0

0.4

15.7

– corporates
 
13.7

7.6


6.2

0.2

27.7

IRB foundation approach
 
1.6


0.5



2.1

– corporates
 
1.6


0.5



2.1

Standardised approach
 
0.8

0.5

1.2


2.2

4.7

– central governments and central banks
 






– institutions
 


0.1



0.1

– corporates
 
0.8

0.5

1.1


2.2

4.6

CVA advanced
2
3.3





3.3

CVA standardised
2
3.3

3.8

0.3

4.3

0.5

12.2

CCP standardised
 
0.9

0.5


0.8


2.2

At 31 Dec 2015
 
31.9

17.1

2.0

14.6

3.6

69.2

By product
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Derivatives (OTC and Exchange traded derivatives)
 
19.2

12.1

1.5

7.8

2.6

43.2

SFTs
 
3.8

0.4

0.1

2.2

0.5

7.0

Other
1
1.6

0.6




2.2

CVA advanced
2
3.3





3.3

CVA standardised
2
3.3

3.8

0.4

4.2

0.5

12.2

CCP default funds
3
0.7

0.2


0.4


1.3

At 31 Dec 2015
 
31.9

17.1

2.0

14.6

3.6

69.2

1
Includes free deliveries not deducted from regulatory capital.
2
The RWA impact due to the CVA capital charge is calculated based on the exposures under the IRB and standardised approaches. No additional exposures are taken into account.
3
Default fund contributions are cash balances posted to CCPs by all members. These cash balances are not included in the total reported exposure.

52
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Wrong-way risk
Wrong-way risk occurs when a counterparty’s exposures are adversely correlated with its credit quality.
There are two types of wrong-way risk.
General wrong-way risk occurs when the probability of counterparty default is positively correlated with general risk factors, for example, where a counterparty is resident and/or incorporated in a higher-risk country and seeks to sell a non-domestic currency in exchange for its home currency.
Specific wrong-way risk occurs in self-referencing transactions. These are transactions in which exposure is driven by capital or financing instruments issued by the counterparty and occurs where exposure from HSBC’s perspective materially increases as the value of the counterparty’s capital or financing instruments referenced in the contract decreases. It is HSBC policy that specific wrong-way transactions are approved on a case-by-case basis.
We use a range of tools to monitor and control wrong-way risk, including requiring the business to obtain prior approval before undertaking wrong-way risk transactions outside pre-agreed guidelines. The regional Traded Risk functions are responsible for the control and monitoring process within an overarching Group framework and limit framework.
Central counterparties
While exchange traded derivatives have been cleared through CCP’s for many years, recent regulatory initiatives designed to reduce systemic risk in the banking system are directing increasing volumes of OTC derivatives to be cleared through CCPs.
A dedicated CCP risk team has been established to manage the interface with CCPs and undertake in-depth due diligence of the unique risks associated with these organisations. This is to address an implication of the regulations that the Group’s risk will be transferred from being distributed among individual, bilateral counterparties to a significant level of risk concentration on CCPs. We have developed a risk appetite framework to manage risk accordingly, on an individual CCP and global basis.
Securitisation
Group securitisation strategy
HSBC acts as originator, sponsor, liquidity provider and derivative counterparty to our own originated and sponsored securitisations, as well as those of third parties. Our strategy is to use securitisation to meet our needs for aggregate funding or
 
capital management, to the extent that market, regulatory treatments and other conditions are suitable, and for customer facilitation. We do not provide support to any of our originated or sponsored securitisations, and it is not our policy to do so.
We have senior exposures to the Securities Investment Conduits (‘SICs’): Mazarin Funding Limited, Barion Funding Limited, Malachite Funding Limited and we hold all of the commercial paper issued by Solitaire Funding Limited. These are considered legacy businesses, and exposures are being repaid as the securities they hold amortise.
Group securitisation roles
Our roles in the securitisation process are as follows:
Originator: where we originate the assets being securitised, either directly or indirectly;
Sponsor: where we establish and manage a securitisation programme that purchases exposures from third parties; and
Investor: where we invest in a securitisation transaction directly or provide derivatives or liquidity facilities to a securitisation.
HSBC as originator
We use SPEs to securitise customer loans and advances and other debt that we have originated in order to diversify our sources of funding for asset origination and for capital efficiency purposes. In such cases, we transfer the loans and advances to the SPEs for cash, and the SPEs issue debt securities to investors to fund the cash purchases.
In addition, we use SPEs to mitigate the capital absorbed by some of the customer loans and advances we have originated. Credit derivatives are used to transfer the credit risk associated with such customer loans and advances to an SPE, using securitisations commonly known as synthetic securitisations by which the SPE writes CDS protection for HSBC.
In 2015, HSBC issued a synthetic securitisation, comprising drawn and undrawn seasoned corporate loans to relationship clients with a portfolio maximum notional amount of $5bn. The significant risk transfer for this synthetic securitisation is effected via an SPE which has sold protection on a $0.3bn tranche. The protection is collateralised from the proceeds of bonds issued by the SPE. The SPE for this securitisation is consolidated for accounting purposes but not for regulatory purposes.
HSBC as sponsor
We are sponsor to a number of types of securitisation entities, details of which can be found in Note 38 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016 and the table below.

Entity
Entity description and nature of exposure
Accounting
consolidation
Regulatory
consolidation
Regulatory treatment
Solitaire
Asset-backed commercial paper (‘ABCP’) conduit to which a first-loss letter of credit and transaction-specific liquidity facilities are provided
P
P
Look through to risk weights of underlying assets
Barion
Vehicle to which senior term funding is provided
P
O
Exposures (including derivatives and liquidity facilities) are risk-weighted as securitisation positions
Malachite
Vehicle to which senior term funding is provided
P
O
Mazarin
Vehicle to which senior term funding is provided
P
O
Regency
Multi-seller conduit to which senior liquidity facilities and programme-wide credit enhancement are provided
P
O

HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
53


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


HSBC as investor
We have exposure to third-party securitisations across a wide range of sectors in the form of investments, liquidity facilities and as a derivative counterparty. These are primarily legacy exposures.
Monitoring of securitisation positions
Securitisation positions are managed by a dedicated team that uses a combination of market standard systems and third-party data providers to monitor performance data and manage market and credit risks.
In the case of re-securitisation positions, similar processes are conducted in respect of the underlying securitisations.
Liquidity risk of securitised assets is consistently managed as part of the Group’s liquidity and funding risk management framework and further details are provided on page 108 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Valuation of securitisation positions
The valuation process of our investments in securitisation exposures primarily focuses on quotations from third parties, observed trade levels and calibrated valuations from market standard models.
Our hedging and credit risk mitigation strategy, with regards to retained securitisation and re-securitisation exposures, is to continually review our positions. Currently, there are no material hedges in place and no credit risk mitigation is recognised on RWAs for our retained securitisation or re-securitisation positions.
Securitisation accounting treatment
For accounting purposes, we consolidate structured entities (including SPEs) when the substance of the relationship indicates that we control them, that is, we are exposed, or have rights, to variable returns from our involvement with the structured entity and have the ability to affect those returns through our power over the entity.
Full details of these assessments and our accounting policy on structured entities may be found in Note 1(g) and Note 39 respectively of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
We reassess the required consolidation whenever there is a change in the substance of the relationship between HSBC and a structured entity.
HSBC enters into transactions in the normal course of business by which it transfers financial assets to structured entities. Depending on the circumstances, these transfers may either result in these financial assets being fully or partly derecognised or continuing to be recognised in their entirety.
Full derecognition occurs when we transfer our contractual right to receive cash flows from the financial assets, or retain the right but assume an obligation to pass on the cash flows from the assets, and transfer substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership. Only in the event that derecognition is achieved are sales and any resultant gains on sales recognised in the financial statements.
Partial derecognition occurs when we sell or otherwise transfer financial assets in such a way that some but not substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership are transferred and control is retained. These financial assets are recognised on the balance sheet to the extent of our continuing involvement and an associated liability is also recognised. The net carrying amount of the financial asset and associated liability will be based on the measurement basis of the financial asset, either
 
the amortised cost or the fair value of the rights and obligations retained by the entity.
Further disclosure of such transfers may be found in Note 16 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Securitisation regulatory treatment
For regulatory purposes, any reduction in RWAs that would be achieved by our own originated securitisations must receive the PRA’s permission and be justified by a commensurate transfer of credit risk to third parties. If achieved, the associated SPEs and underlying assets are not consolidated but exposures to them, including derivatives or liquidity facilities, are risk-weighted as securitisation positions.
For the majority of our securitisation non-trading book positions, we use the IRB approach, and within this principally the RBM, with lesser amounts on IAA and SFM. We also use the standardised approach for an immaterial amount of non-trading book positions. Securitisation positions in the trading book are overseen within Market Risk using the standardised approach. Our securitisation and re-securitisation RWAs do not benefit from any credit risk mitigation.
The IAA is limited to exposures arising from Regency Assets Limited, mainly related to liquidity facilities and credit enhancement. Eligible ECAI rating methodology, which includes stress factors, is applied to each asset class in order to derive the equivalent rating level for each transaction. This methodology is verified by the internal credit function as part of the approval process for each new transaction. The performance of each underlying asset portfolio, including residential and commercial mortgages and re-securitisations, is monitored to confirm that the applicable equivalent rating level still applies and is independently verified. Our IAA approach is also audited periodically by Internal Audit and reviewed by the PRA.
There was $0.7bn (2015: $1.0bn) of unrealised losses on Asset-backed securities (‘ABS’) in the year, also disclosed on page 143 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016, which fully relates to assets within SPEs that are consolidated for regulatory purposes.
Analysis of securitisation exposures
HSBC’s involvement in securitisation activities reflects the following:
securitisation positions are not backed by revolving exposures other than trade receivables in Regency Assets Limited, which is unchanged from 2015;
facilities are not subject to early amortisation provisions (2015: nil);
$4.7bn positions held as synthetic transactions
(2015: $4.7bn);
no assets awaiting securitisation (2015: nil);
total exposures include off-balance sheet exposure of $15.1bn (2015: $17.1bn), mainly relating to contingent liquidity lines provided to securitisation vehicles where we act as sponsor, with a small amount from derivative exposures where we are an investor. The off-balance sheet exposures are held in the non-trading book and the exposure types are residential mortgages, commercial mortgages, trade receivables and re-securitisations; and
no realised losses on securitisation asset disposals in the year (2015: nil).
Further details of our securitisation exposures may be found on page 143 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.


54
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 39: Securitisation exposure – movement in the year
 
 
 
Total at
1 Jan

Movement in year
Total at
31 Dec

 
 
As originator

As sponsor

As investor

 
Footnotes
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

Aggregate amount of securitisation exposures
 
 
 
 
 
 
Residential mortgages
1
3.2



(0.1
)
3.1

Commercial mortgages
1
3.8



(0.2
)
3.6

Leasing
 
0.1



(0.1
)

Loans to corporates or SMEs
 
6.2



(1.3
)
4.9

Consumer loans
 
0.5



0.6

1.1

Trade receivables
2
20.4


(3.0
)
(0.1
)
17.3

Other assets
 



0.8

0.8

Re-securitisations
1
10.2

(0.4
)
(2.5
)
(0.4
)
6.9

2016
 
44.4

(0.4
)
(5.5
)
(0.8
)
37.7

Aggregate amount of securitisation exposures
 
 
 
 
 
 
Residential mortgages
1
4.2



(1.0
)
3.2

Commercial mortgages
1
4.2



(0.4
)
3.8

Leasing
 
0.1




0.1

Loans to corporates or SMEs
 
1.1

4.7


0.4

6.2

Consumer loans
 
0.3



0.2

0.5

Trade receivables
2
15.9


4.5


20.4

Re-securitisations
1
15.8

(0.4
)
(4.6
)
(0.6
)
10.2

2015
 
41.6

4.3

(0.1
)
(1.4
)
44.4

1
Residential and Commercial mortgages and re-securitisations principally include exposures to Solitaire Funding Limited, Mazarin Funding Limited, Barion Funding Limited and Malachite Funding Limited and restructured on-balance sheet assets. The pools primarily comprise the senior tranches of retail mortgage backed securities, commercial mortgage backed securities, auto ABS, credit card ABS, student loans, collateralised debt obligations and also include bank subordinated debt.
2
Trade receivables largely relate to Regency Assets Limited and pools are senior with a maturity of less than 10 years.

Table 40: Securitisation – asset values and impairments
 
 
2016
2015
 
 
Underlying assets1
Securitisation
exposures
impairment

Underlying assets1
Securitisation
exposures
impairment

 
 
Total3

Impaired and past due

Total

Impaired and past due

 
Footnotes
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

As originator
 
6.3

1.2

0.4

6.7

1.6

0.5

– residential mortgages
 



0.1



– loans to corporates and SMEs
 
5.0



5.0



– re-securitisations
2
1.3

1.2

0.4

1.6

1.6

0.5

As sponsor
 
22.1

0.1

0.1

30.8

0.1

0.1

– commercial mortgages
 



2.2



– trade receivables
 
16.5



18.7



– re-securitisations
2
5.6

0.1

0.1

9.9

0.1

0.1

At 31 Dec
 
 
 
0.5

 
 
0.6

1
Securitisation exposures may exceed the underlying asset values when HSBC provides liquidity facilities while also acting as derivative counterparty and a note holder in the SPE.
2
The amount of underlying assets reported for re-securitisations denotes the value of collateral within the re-securitisation vehicles.
3
As originator and sponsor, all associated underlying assets are held in the non-trading book. These assets are all underlying to traditional securitisations with the exception of ‘loans to corporates and SMEs’, which is underlying to a synthetic securitisation.

HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
55


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Market risk
Overview of market risk in global businesses
Market risk is the risk that movements in market factors, such as foreign exchange rates, interest rates, credit spreads, equity prices and commodity prices, will reduce our income or the value of our portfolios.
Exposure to market risk
Exposure to market risk is separated into two portfolios:
Trading portfolios comprise positions arising from market-making.
Non-trading portfolios comprise positions that primarily arise from the interest rate management of our retail and commercial banking assets and liabilities, financial investments designated as available-for-sale (‘AFS’) and
 
held to maturity, and exposures arising from our insurance operations.
Where appropriate, we apply similar risk management policies and measurement techniques to both trading and non-trading portfolios. Our objective is to manage and control market risk exposures in order to optimise return on risk while maintaining a market profile consistent within our established risk appetite.
The nature of the hedging and risk mitigation strategies performed across the Group corresponds to the market risk management instruments available within each operating jurisdiction. These strategies range from the use of traditional market instruments, such as interest rate swaps, to more sophisticated hedging strategies to address a combination of risk factors arising at portfolio level. For a discussion on hedging risk and monitoring the continuing effectiveness of hedges, refer to page 233 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
The table below reflects the components of capital requirement under the standardised approach for market risk.

Table 41: Market risk under standardised approach
 
 
a
 
 
RWA

 
 
$bn

 
Outright products
 
1
– interest rate risk (general and specific)
1.5

2
– equity risk (general and specific)
1.7

3
– foreign exchange risk
0.3

4
– commodity risk

 
Options
 
5
– simplified approach

6
– delta-plus method

7
– scenario approach

8
Securitisation
1.5

9
Total
5.0


Market risk governance
GB&M manages market risk, where majority of the total VaR of HSBC (excluding insurance) and almost all trading VaR resides, using risk limits approved by the Group Management Board (‘GMB’). For a discussion on market risk governance refer to page 110 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Market risk measures
Monitoring and limiting market risk exposures
Our objective is to manage and control market risk exposures while maintaining a market profile consistent with our risk appetite.
We use a range of tools to monitor and limit market risk exposures including sensitivity analysis, VaR and stress testing.
Sensitivity analysis
We use sensitivity measures to monitor the market risk positions within each risk type. Sensitivity limits are set for portfolios, products and risk types, with the depth of the market being one of the principal factors in determining the level of limits set.
Value at risk
VaR is a technique that estimates the potential losses on risk positions in the trading portfolio as a result of movements in market rates and prices over a specified time horizon and to a given level of confidence. The use of VaR is integrated into market risk management and is calculated for all trading positions regardless of how we capitalise those exposures.


 
Where there is not an approved internal model, we use the appropriate local rules to capitalise exposures locally.
In addition, we calculate VaR for non-trading portfolios to have a complete picture of risk. Our models are predominantly based on historical simulation. VaR is calculated at a 99% confidence level for a one-day holding period. Where we do not calculate VaR explicitly, we use alternative tools as described in the stress testing section below.
Our VaR models derive plausible future scenarios from past series of recorded market rates and prices, taking into account inter-relationships between different markets and rates such as interest rates and foreign exchange rates. Our models use a mixed approach when applying changes in market rates and prices:
Equity, credit and FX risk factors the potential movements are typically represented on a relative return basis.
Interest rates, a mixed approach is used. Curve movements are typically absolute whereas volatilities are on a relative return basis.
We use the past two years as the data set in our VaR models, which is updated on a fortnightly basis, and these scenarios are then applied to the market baselines and trading positions on a daily basis. The models also incorporate the effect of option features on the underlying exposures.
The valuation approach used in our models include:
non-linear instruments are valued using a full revaluation approach; and
linear instruments, such as bonds and swap, are valued using a sensitivity based approach.
The nature of the VaR models means that an increase in observed market volatility will lead to an increase in VaR even without any changes in the underlying positions.


56
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

VaR model limitations
Although a valuable guide to risk, VaR should always be viewed in the context of its limitations, for example:
the use of historical data as a proxy for estimating future events may not encompass all potential events, particularly those which are extreme in nature;
the use of a holding period assumes that all positions can be liquidated or the risks offset during that period. This may not fully reflect the market risk arising at times of severe illiquidity, when the holding period may be insufficient to liquidate or hedge all positions fully;
the use of a 99% confidence level by definition does not take into account losses that might occur beyond this level of confidence; and
VaR is calculated on the basis of exposures outstanding at close of business and therefore does not necessarily reflect intra-day exposures.
Risk not in VaR framework
The Risks not in VaR (‘RNIV’) framework captures risks from exposures in the HSBC trading book which are not captured well by the VaR model. Our VaR model is designed to capture significant basis risk such as CDS versus bond, asset swap spreads and cross-currency basis. Other basis risks which are not completely covered in VaR, such as the London interbank offered rate (‘Libor’) tenor basis, are complemented by our RNIV calculations and are integrated into our capital framework.
Risk factors are reviewed on a regular basis and either incorporated directly in the VaR models, where possible, or quantified through the VaR-based RNIV approach or a stress test approach within the RNIV framework. The severity of the scenarios is calibrated to be in line with the capital adequacy requirements. The outcome of the VaR-based RNIV is included in the VaR calculation and back-testing; a stressed VaR RNIV is also computed for the risk factors considered in the VaR-based RNIV approach.
Stress-type RNIVs include a gap risk exposure measure to capture risk on non-recourse margin loans and a de-peg risk measure to capture risk to pegged and heavily managed currencies.
 
Back-testing
We routinely validate the accuracy of our VaR models by back-testing them against both actual and hypothetical profit and loss against the corresponding VaR numbers. Hypothetical profit and loss excludes non-modelled items such as fees, commissions and revenues of intra-day transactions.
The actual number of profits or losses in excess of VaR over this period can therefore be used to gauge how well the models are performing.
We back-test VaR at various levels which reflect a full legal entity scope of HSBC, including entities that do not have local permission to use VaR for regulatory purposes. Back-testing using the regulatory hierarchy includes entities which have approval to use VaR in the calculation of market risk regulatory capital requirement.
HSBC submits separate back-testing results to regulators, including the PRA and the European Central Bank, based on applicable frequencies ranging from two business days after an exception occurs, to quarterly submissions.
In terms of the CRD IV rules, VaR back-testing loss, and not profit, exceptions count towards the multiplier determined by the PRA the purposes of the capital requirement calculation for market risk. The multiplier capital add-on does not get increased if there are less than five loss exceptions.
Refer to the table MR4 below for a one-year history for VaR back-testing exceptions against both actual and hypothetical profit and loss.
In 2016, the PRA VaR approved entities experienced three profit exceptions against actual profit and loss: the June exceptions, driven by significant devaluations in sterling and the euro against the US dollar resulting from the UK’s referendum on EU membership and the October exception, driven by certain cross- currency pair spread tightening on a long position and the sterling depreciating on short positions.
In 2016, the PRA VaR approved entities experienced two backtesting exceptions against hypothetical profit and loss: a loss exception in February, driven by Libor against overnight index spread widening on long positions; and a profit exception in June, based on the same driver described above in exceptions against actual profit and loss.
There was no evidence of model errors or control failures.
The back-testing result excludes exceptions due from changes in fair value adjustments.


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
57


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Chart: MR4: Comparison of VaR estimates with gains/losses
VaR back-testing exceptions against actual profit & loss
pillar3docu_chart-49868.jpg
 
Actual profit and loss
 
VaR
w
Back-testing profit exception
 

VaR back-testing exceptions against hypothetical profit & loss
pillar3docu_chart-55855.jpg
 
Hypothetical profit and loss
 
VaR
w
Back-testing profit exception
 

Stress testing
Stress testing is an important procedure that is integrated into our market risk management framework to evaluate the potential impact on portfolio values of more extreme, although plausible, events or movements in a set of financial variables. In such scenarios, losses can be greater than those predicted by VaR modelling.
Stress testing is implemented at legal entity, regional and overall Group levels. A set of scenarios is used consistently across all regions within the Group. Scenarios are tailored to capture the relevant events or market movements at each level. The risk appetite around potential stress losses for the Group is set and monitored against referral limits.
 
Market risk reverse stress tests are undertaken on the premise that there is a fixed loss. The stress testing process identifies which scenarios lead to this loss. The rationale behind the reverse stress test is to understand scenarios that are beyond normal business settings and could have contagion and systemic implications.
Stressed VaR and stress testing, together with reverse stress testing and the management of gap risk, provide management with insights regarding the ‘tail risk’ beyond VaR, for which HSBC’s appetite is limited.
The Market risk stress testing incorporates the historical and hypothetical events. During 2016 we devised and ran stress hypothetical scenarios to specific events including the UK’s European Union Referendum and the US elections.


58
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Market risk capital models
There are a number of measures which HSBC has permission to use in calculating regulatory capital which are listed in table 42. For regulatory purposes, the trading book comprises all positions in CRD financial instruments and commodities which are held with trading intent, which are taken with the intention of benefiting from short-term gains or positions where it can be demonstrated that they hedge positions in the trading book. Trading book positions must either be free of any restrictive covenants on their tradability or be capable of being hedged.
 
A CRD financial instrument is defined as any contract that gives rise to both a financial asset to one party and a financial liability or equity instrument to another party.
HSBC maintains a trading book policy which defines the minimum requirements for trading book positions and the process for classifying positions as trading or non-trading book. Positions in the trading book are subject to market risk-based rules, i.e. market risk capital, computed using regulatory approved models. Otherwise, the market risk capital is calculated using the Standardised approach.
If any of the policy criteria are not met, then the position is categorised as a non-trading book exposure.

 
 
 
 
 
 Table 42: Market risk models1
 
Model component
Confidence
level

Liquidity horizon
Model description and methodology
 
VaR
99
%
10 day
Uses most recent two years’ history of daily returns to determine a loss distribution. The result is scaled, using the square root of 10, from one day to provide an equivalent 10-day loss.
 
Stressed VaR
99
%
10 day
Stressed VaR is calibrated to a one-year period of stress observed in history.
 
IRC
99.9
%
1 year
Uses a multi-factor Gaussian Monte-Carlo simulation, which includes product basis, concentration, hedge mismatch, recovery rate and liquidity as part of the simulation process. A minimum liquidity horizon of three months is applied and is based on a combination of factors, including issuer type, currency and size of exposure.
 
Options
n/a

n/a
Uses a standard charge scenario approach based on a spot volatility grid where, for each point on the grid, there is a full revaluation of the portfolio. The regulators prescribe the ranges therefore there is no equivalence with confidence level and liquidity horizon.
1
Non-proprietary details are available in the Financial Services Register on the PRA website.
Table 43: IMA values for trading portfolios
 
 
$m

VaR (10 day 99%)
 
 
1
Maximum value
327.1

2
Average value
229.6

3
Minimum value
186.4

4
Period end
215.7

Stressed VaR (10 day 99%)
 
 
5
Maximum value
454.0

6
Average value
389.9

7
Minimum value
269.7

8
Period end
269.7

Incremental Risk Charge (99.9%)
 
 
9
Maximum value
1,100.7

10
Average value
787.0

11
Minimum value
697.3

12
Period end
705.6

VaR
VaR used for regulatory purposes differs from VaR used for management purpose with key differences listed below.
VaR
Regulatory

Management

Scope
Regulatory approval (PRA)

Broader population of trading and non-trading book positions

Confidence interval
99
%
99
%
Liquidity horizon
10 day

1 day

Data set
Past 2 years

Past 2 years

The trading books which received approval from the regulator to be covered via an internal model are used to calculate VaR for regulatory purposes. Regulatory VaR levels contribute to the calculation of market risk RWAs.
The regulatory VaR table is based on the regulatory permissions received, plus aggregated sites. This differs from the daily VaR reported in the Annual Report and Accounts which shows a fully diversified view used for internal risk management.
 
Stressed VaR
Stressed VaR is primarily used for regulatory capital purposes and is integrated into the risk management process to ensure prudent capital management. Stressed VaR complements other risk measures by providing the potential losses under stressed market conditions.
Stressed VaR modelling follows the same approach as our VaR risk measure except for the following:
potential market movements employed for stressed VaR calculations are based on a continuous one-year period of stress for the trading portfolio;
the choice of period changed from (January 2008 to December 2008) to (April 2008 to March 2009) in the second quarter of 2016 and is based on the assessment at the Group level of the most volatile period in recent history;
it is calculated to a 99% confidence using a 10-day holding period; and
it based on an actual 10-day holding period whereas Regulatory VaR is based on a one-day holding period scaled to 10 days.


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
59


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Incremental Risk Charge
The IRC measures the default and migration risk of issuers of traded instruments.
IRC risk factors include credit migration, default, product basis, concentration, hedge mismatch, recovery rate and liquidity. The PDs are floored to reflect the lack of historical data on defaults and a period of stress is used to calibrate the spread changes for the relevant ratings. The IRC model is validated quarterly by stressing key model parameters and reviewing the response of the model.
The IRC is a stand-alone charge generating no diversification benefit with other charges. We do not use weighted averages for calculating the liquidity horizon for the IRC measure. IRC relies on a range of liquidity horizons from three months, corresponding to the regulatory floor, to one year. A wide range of criteria can indicate the liquidity of a position. The liquidity horizon for the IRC measure depends on a set of factors such as issuer features, including rating, sector, geography and size of positions, including product, maturity and concentration.
The IRC transition matrices are calibrated using transition and default data published by three rating agencies (Standard & Poor’s, Moody’s and Fitch Ratings) as the starting point, in combination with internal rules for flooring. The average of the three matrices is computed for each sector, ignoring zero transition probabilities. The PDs are then floored: sovereign PDs are consistent with IRB, while a 3bp floor is applied to corporates’ and banks’ PDs.
The IRC correlation matrix is derived from historical CDS spreads data, covering the latest two-year VaR period. The returns estimation window is set equal to either three, or 12 months, depending on the liquidity horizon of each obligor. First, each obligor is mapped to six sector/rating categories; then the correlation matrix is obtained by computing the arithmetic mean of correlations for each category.
Prudent valuation adjustment
HSBC has documented policies and maintains systems and controls for the calculation of Prudent Valuation Adjustment (‘PVA’). Prudent value is an estimated conservative price with a 90% degree of certainty that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in orderly transactions occurring between market participants at the balance sheet date. HSBC’s methodology addresses fair value uncertainties arising from a number of sources; market price uncertainty, bid offer (‘close out’) uncertainty, model risk, concentration, administrative cost, CVA (‘unearned credit spread’) and FFVA.
Structural foreign exchange exposures
Structural foreign exchange exposures represent net investments in subsidiaries, branches and associates, the functional currencies of which are currencies other than the US dollar. An entity’s functional currency is that of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates.
Exchange differences on structural exposures are recognised in ‘Other comprehensive income’. We use the US dollar as our presentation currency in our consolidated financial statements because the US dollar and currencies linked to it form the major currency bloc in which we transact and fund our business. Our consolidated balance sheet is, therefore, affected by exchange differences between the US dollar and all the non-US dollar functional currencies of underlying subsidiaries.
We hedge structural foreign exchange exposures only in limited circumstances. Our structural foreign exchange exposures are managed with the primary objective of ensuring, where practical, that our consolidated capital ratios and the capital ratios of individual banking subsidiaries are largely protected from the effect of changes in exchange rates.
 
Details of our structural foreign exchange exposures are provided in the Market risk section, on page 154 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Interest rate risk in the banking book
Interest rate risk in the banking book arises principally from mismatches between the future yield on assets and their funding cost, as a result of interest rate changes. Analysis of this risk is complicated by having to make assumptions on embedded optionality within certain product areas such as the incidence of mortgage prepayments, and from behavioural assumptions regarding the economic duration of liabilities which are contractually repayable on demand such as current accounts, and the repricing behaviour of managed rate products. These assumptions around behavioural features are captured in our interest rate risk behaviouralisation framework, which is described below.
We aim, through our management of interest rate risk in the banking book, to mitigate the effect of prospective interest rate movements which could reduce future net interest income, while balancing the cost of such hedging activities on the current net revenue stream.
Our funds transfer pricing policies give rise to a two-stage funds transfer pricing approach. For details, see page 109 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
The economic capital requirement for interest rate risk in the banking book is measured using a two-step approach. For details, see page 112 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Asset, Liability and Capital Management (‘ALCM’) is responsible for measuring and controlling interest rate risk in the banking book under the supervision of the RMM. Its primary responsibilities are:
to define the rules governing the transfer of interest rate risk from the commercial bank to Balance Sheet Management(‘BSM’);
to ensure that all market interest rate risk that can be hedged is effectively transferred from the global businesses to BSM; and
to define the rules and metrics for monitoring the residual interest rate risk in the global businesses.
The different types of interest rate risk in the banking book and the controls which the Group uses to quantify and limit its exposure to these risks can be categorised as follows:
risk that is transferred to BSM and managed by BSM within a defined risk mandate;
risk that remains outside BSM because it cannot be hedged or which arises due to our behaviouralised transfer pricing assumptions. This risk will be captured by our net interest income economic value of equity (‘EVE’) sensitivity, and corresponding limits are part of our global and regional risk appetite statement for non-trading interest rate risk. A typical example would be margin compression created by unusually low rates in key currencies;
basis risk that is transferred to BSM when it can be hedged. Any residual basis risk remaining in the global businesses is reported to Asset and Liability Management Committee (‘ALCO’). A typical example would be a managed rate savings product transfer-priced using a Libor-based interest rate curve; and
model risks that cannot be captured by net interest income or EVE sensitivity but are controlled by our stress testing framework. A typical example would be prepayment risk on residential mortgages or pipeline risk.
Details of the Group’s monitoring of the sensitivity of projected net interest income under varying interest rate scenarios may be found on page 113 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.


60
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Interest rate risk behaviouralisation
Unlike liquidity risk, which is assessed on the basis of a very severe stress scenario, interest rate risk in the banking book is assessed and managed according to ‘business-as-usual’ conditions. In many cases, the contractual profile of non-trading assets/liabilities arising from assets/liabilities created outside Markets or BSM does not reflect the behaviour observed.
Behaviouralisation is therefore used to assess the market interest rate risk of assets/liabilities in the banking book and this assessed market risk is transferred to BSM, in accordance with the rules governing the transfer of interest rate risk from the global businesses to BSM.
Behaviouralisation is applied in three key areas:
the assessed repricing frequency of managed rate balances;
the assessed duration of non-interest bearing balances, typically capital and current accounts; and
the base case expected prepayment behaviour or pipeline take-up rate for fixed rate balances with embedded optionality.
Interest rate behaviouralisation policies have to be formulated in line with the Group’s behaviouralisation policies and approved at least annually by local ALCOs, regional ALCM teams and Group ALCM, in conjunction with local, regional and Group market risk monitoring teams.
The extent to which balances can be behaviouralised is driven by:
the amount of the current balance that can be assessed as ‘stable’ under business-as-usual conditions; and
for managed rate balances the historic market interest rate repricing behaviour observed; or
for non-interest bearing balances the duration for which the balance is expected to remain under business-as-usual conditions. This assessment is often driven by the re-investment tenors available to BSM to neutralise the risk through the use of fixed rate government bonds or interest rate derivatives, and for derivatives the availability of cash flow hedging capacity.
Balance Sheet Management
Effective governance across BSM is supported by the dual reporting lines it has to the Chief Executive Officer of GB&M and to the Group Treasurer. In each operating entity, BSM is responsible for managing liquidity and funding under the supervision of the local ALCO (which usually meets on a monthly basis). It also manages the banking book interest rate positions transferred to it within a Markets limit structure.
In executing the management of the liquidity risk on behalf of ALCO, and managing the interest rate risk in the banking book positions transferred to it, BSM invests in highly rated liquid assets in line with the Group’s liquid asset policy. The majority of the liquidity is invested in central bank deposits and government, supranational and agency securities with most of the remainder held in short-term interbank and central bank loans.
Withdrawable central bank deposits are accounted for as cash balances. Interbank loans, statutory central bank reserves and loans to central banks are accounted for as loans and advances to banks. BSM’s holdings of securities are accounted for as AFS or, to a lesser extent, held-to-maturity assets.
Statutory central bank reserves are not recognised as liquid assets. The statutory reserves that would be released in line with the Group’s stressed customer deposit outflow assumptions are reflected as stressed inflows.
 
BSM is permitted to use derivatives as part of its mandate to manage interest rate risk. Derivative activity is predominantly through the use of vanilla interest rate swaps which are part of cash flow hedging and fair value hedging relationships.
Credit risk in BSM is predominantly limited to short-term bank exposure created by interbank lending, exposure to central banks and high-quality sovereigns, supranationals or agencies which constitute the majority of BSM’s liquidity portfolio. BSM does not manage the structural credit risk of any Group entity balance sheets.
BSM is permitted to enter into single name and index credit derivatives activity, but it does so to manage credit risk on the exposure specific to its securities portfolio in limited circumstances only. The risk limits are extremely limited and closely monitored. At 31 December 2016, BSM had no open credit derivative index risk.
VaR is calculated on both trading and non-trading positions held in BSM. It is calculated by applying the same methodology used for the Markets business and utilised as a tool for market risk control purposes.
BSM holds trading portfolio instruments in only very limited circumstances. These positions and the associated VaR were not significant during 2016.
Net interest income sensitivity
A principal part of our management of market risk in non-trading portfolios is to monitor the sensitivity of projected net interest income under varying interest rate scenarios (simulation modelling). This monitoring is undertaken at an entity level by local ALCOs.
Entities apply a combination of scenarios and assumptions relevant to their local businesses, and standard scenarios which are required throughout HSBC. The latter are consolidated to illustrate the combined pro forma effect on our consolidated net interest income.
Projected net interest income sensitivity figures represent the effect of the pro forma movements in net interest income based on the projected yield curve scenarios and the Group’s current interest rate risk profile. This effect, however, does not incorporate actions which would probably be taken by BSM or in the business units to mitigate the effect of interest rate risk. In reality, BSM seeks proactively to change the interest rate risk profile to minimise losses and optimise net revenues. The net interest income sensitivity calculations assume that interest rates of all maturities move by the same amount in the ‘up-shock’ scenario. Rates are not assumed to become negative in the ‘down-shock’ scenario which may, in certain currencies, effectively result in non-parallel shock. In addition, the net interest income sensitivity calculations take account of the effect on net interest income of anticipated differences in changes between interbank interest rates and interest rates over which the entity has discretion in terms of the timing and extent of rate changes.



HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
61


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Operational risk
Overview and objectives
Operational risk is the risk to achieving our strategy or objectives as a result of inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems or from external events.
Operational risk is relevant to every aspect of our business. It covers a wide spectrum of issues, in particular legal, compliance, security and fraud. Losses arising from breaches of regulation and law, unauthorised activities, error, omission,
 
inefficiency, fraud, systems failure or external events all fall within the definition of operational risk.
We have historically experienced operational risk losses in the following major categories:
possible mis-selling of products;
fraudulent and other external criminal activities;
breakdowns in processes/procedures due to human error, misjudgement or malice;
system failure or non-availability; and
breach of regulatory and/or legislative requirements.

Table 44: Operational risk RWAs
 
 
2016
2015
 
 
Capital
required

RWAs

Capital
required

RWAs

 
Footnote
   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

By global business
 
 
 
 
 
Retail Banking and Wealth Management
1
2.4

30.5

2.5

31.0

Commercial Banking
1
2.0

25.3

1.9

24.0

Global Banking and Markets
 
2.6

32.0

2.8

35.8

Global Private Banking
 
0.2

2.9

0.3

3.3

Corporate Centre
 
0.6

7.3

1.7

21.3

At 31 Dec
 
7.8

98.0

9.2

115.4

By geographical region
 
 
 
 
 
Europe
 
2.5

30.9

2.8

34.9

Asia
 
2.9

36.6

3.8

47.1

Middle East and North Africa
 
0.6

7.5

0.5

6.2

North America
 
1.0

12.8

1.1

14.1

Latin America
 
0.8

10.2

1.0

13.1

At 31 Dec
 
7.8

98.0

9.2

115.4

1
In the first half of 2015, a portfolio of customers was transferred from CMB to RBWM in Latin America in order to better align the combined banking needs of the customers with our established global businesses. Comparative data have been re-presented accordingly.

Requirements under CRD IV include a capital requirement for operational risk, utilising three levels of sophistication as stated on page 17. We have historically adopted, and currently use, the standardised approach in determining our operational risk capital requirements. Table 44 sets out our operational risk capital requirements by region and global businesses. We use an operational risk model for economic capital calculation purposes.
During 2016, our operational risk profile continued to be dominated by compliance risks as referred to in the ‘Top and emerging risks’ section on page 89 and in the ‘Regulatory compliance risk management’ section on page 114 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016. Operational risk losses in 2016 are lower than in 2015, reflecting a reduction in losses incurred relating to large legacy conduct-related events. Conduct-related costs included in significant items are outlined on page 61.
The regulatory environment in which we operate is increasing the cost of doing business and could reduce our future profitability. The implementation of Global Standards remains one of the key strategic priorities for the Group and is ongoing.
We recognise that operational risk losses can be incurred for a wide variety of reasons, including rare but extreme events.
The objective of our operational risk management is to manage and control operational risk in a cost-effective manner and within our risk appetite, as defined by GMB.

 
Organisation and responsibilities
Responsibility for managing operational risk lies with HSBC’s staff.
HSBC’s Operational Risk Management Framework (‘ORMF’) is our overarching approach to managing operational risk, the purpose of which is to:
identify and manage our operational risks in an effective manner;
remain within the Group‘s operational risk appetite, which helps the organisation understand the level of risk it is willing to accept; and
drive forward-looking risk awareness and assist management focus during 2016.
Activity to strengthen our risk culture and better embed the use of the ORMF was further implemented in 2016. In particular, the use of the three lines of defence model.
The First Line of Defence owns the risk and is responsible for identifying, recording, reporting, managing the risks and ensuring that the right controls and assessments are in place to mitigate these risks. The Second Line of Defence sets the policy and guidelines for managing the risks and provides advice, guidance and challenge to the First Line of Defence on effective risk management. The Third Line of Defence is Internal Audit which independently ensures we are managing risk effectively.
More details on our ORMF may be found on page 114 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.


62
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

The Global Operational Risk Committee, which reports to RMM, meets monthly to discuss key risk issues and review the effective implementation of the ORMF.
Operational risk is organised as a specific risk discipline within Global Risk. The Group Head of Operational Risk is responsible for establishing and maintaining the ORMF, monitoring the level of operational losses and the effectiveness of the internal control environment supported by their Second Line of Defence functions. The Group Head of Operational Risk is accountable to the Group Chief Risk Officer in respect of this element of the overall Enterprise Wide Risk Management framework.
Measurement and monitoring
We have codified our ORMF in a high level standard, supplemented by detailed policies. These policies explain our approach to identifying, assessing, monitoring and controlling operational risk, and give guidance on mitigating actions to be taken when weaknesses are identified.
In 2016, we continued to enhance our ORMF policies and procedures, and further embedded the use of the framework in the management of the business.
Articulation of risk appetite for material operational risks helps the business to understand the level of risk our organisation is willing to take. Monitoring operational risk exposure against risk appetite on a regular basis, and setting out our risk acceptance process, drives risk awareness in a more forward-looking manner. It assists management in determining whether further action is required.
Risk Scenario Analysis across material legal entities provides a top down, forward-looking assessment of risks to help determine whether they are being effectively managed within our risk appetite or whether further management action is required.
In each of our subsidiaries, business managers are responsible for maintaining an appropriate level of internal control, commensurate with the scale and nature of operations. They are responsible for identifying and assessing risks, designing controls and monitoring the effectiveness of these controls. The ORMF helps managers to fulfil these responsibilities by defining a standard risk assessment methodology and providing a tool for the systematic reporting of operational loss data.
Operational risk and control assessment approach
Operational risk and control assessments are performed by individual business units and functions. The risk and control assessment process is designed to provide business areas and functions with a forward-looking view of operational risks, an assessment of the effectiveness of controls, and a tracking mechanism for action plans so that they can proactively manage operational risks within acceptable levels.
 
Appropriate means of mitigation and controls are considered. These include:
making specific changes to strengthen the internal control environment; and
investigating whether cost-effective insurance cover is available to mitigate the risk.
Recording
We use a centralised database to record the results of our operational risk management process. Operational risk and control assessments, as described above, are input and maintained by business units. Business management and Business Risk and Control Managers monitor and follow up the progress of documented action plans.
Operational risk loss reporting
To ensure that operational risk losses are consistently reported and monitored at Group level, all Group companies are required to report individual losses when the net loss is expected to exceed $10,000 and to aggregate all other operational risk losses under $10,000. Losses are entered into the Operational Risk IT system and are reported to Governance on a monthly basis.
Other risks
Pension risk
We operate a number of pension plans throughout the world for our employees. Our plans are either defined benefit or defined contribution plans, which expose the Group to different types of risks. We have a global pension risk management framework and accompanying global policies on the management of these risks, which is overseen by the Global Pensions Oversight Committee.
Details of our management of pension risk may be found in ‘Pension risk management’ on page 117 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Non-trading book exposures in equities
At 31 December 2016, we had equity investments in the non-trading book of $4.9bn (2015: $6.1bn). These consist of investments held for the purposes shown in table 45.

Table 45: Non-trading book equity investments
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2016
2015
 
 
Available for sale

Designated at fair value

Total

Available for sale
Designated at fair value

Total
 
Footnote
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn
$bn

$bn
Strategic investments
 
2.0


2.0

2.1
0.1

2.2
Private equity investments
 
1.2

0.2

1.4

1.9
0.1

2.0
Business facilitation
1
1.5


1.5

1.9

1.9
At 31 Dec
 
4.7

0.2

4.9

5.9
0.2

6.1
1
Includes holdings in government-sponsored enterprises and local stock exchanges.

HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
63


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


We make investments in private equity primarily through managed funds that are subject to limits on the amount of investment. We risk-assess these commitments to ensure that industry and geographical concentrations remain within acceptable levels for the portfolio as a whole, and perform regular reviews to substantiate the valuation of the investments within the portfolio.
Exchange traded investments amounted to $0.9bn (2015: $0.8bn), with the remainder being unlisted. These investments are held at fair value in line with market prices and are mainly strategic in nature.
On a regulatory consolidation basis, the net gain from disposal of equity securities amounted to $1.1bn (2015: $1.8bn), while impairment of AFS equities amounted to $0.0bn (2015: $0.1bn). Unrealised gains on equities of $1.1bn at 31 December 2016 were fully recognised in CET1.
Details of our accounting policy for AFS equity investments and the valuation of financial instruments may be found on page 232 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016. A detailed description of the valuation techniques applied to private equity may be found on page 252 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Risk management of insurance operations
We operate an integrated bancassurance model that provides insurance products principally for customers with whom we have a banking relationship.
The insurance contracts we sell relate to the underlying needs of our banking customers, which we can identify from our point-of-sale contacts and customer knowledge. The majority of sales are of savings and investment products and term and credit life contracts.
By focusing largely on personal and SME lines of business, we are able to optimise volumes and diversify individual insurance risks.
We choose to manufacture these insurance products in HSBC subsidiaries based on an assessment of operational scale and risk appetite. Manufacturing insurance allows us to retain the risks and rewards associated with writing insurance contracts by keeping part of the underwriting profit and investment income within the Group.
We have life insurance manufacturing subsidiaries in nine countries (Argentina, mainland China, France, Hong Kong, Malaysia, Malta, Mexico, Singapore and the UK). We also have life insurance manufacturing associates in Saudi Arabia and India.
Where we do not have the risk appetite or operational scale to be an effective insurance manufacturer, we engage with a handful of leading external insurance companies in order to provide insurance products to our customers through our banking network and direct channels. These arrangements are generally structured with our exclusive strategic partners and earn the Group a combination of commissions, fees and a share of profits. We distribute insurance products in all of our geographical regions.
Insurance products are sold through all global businesses, but predominantly by RBWM and CMB through our branches and direct channels worldwide.
The risk profile of our insurance manufacturing businesses is measured using an economic capital approach. Assets and liabilities are measured on a market value basis, and a capital requirement is defined to ensure that there is a less than one in 200 chance of insolvency over a one-year time horizon, given the risks that the businesses are exposed to. The methodology for the economic capital calculation is largely aligned to the pan-European Solvency II insurance capital regulations, which were applicable from 2016.
 
Subsidiaries engaged in insurance activities are excluded from the regulatory consolidation by excluding assets, liabilities and post-acquisition reserves, leaving the investment of these insurance subsidiaries to be recorded at cost and deducted from CET1 subject to thresholds (amounts below the thresholds are risk-weighted).
Further details of the management of financial risks and insurance risk arising from the insurance operations are provided from page 115 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Liquidity and funding risk
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group does not have sufficient financial resources to meet its obligations as they fall due, or will have to do so at an excessive cost. The risk arises from mismatches in the timing of cash flows. Funding risk is the risk that funding considered to be sustainable, and therefore used to fund assets, is not sustainable over time. The risk arises when the funding needed for illiquid asset positions cannot be obtained at the expected terms and when required.
The objective of our liquidity framework is to allow us to withstand very severe stresses. It is designed to be adaptable to changing business models, markets and regulations.
We do not manage liquidity through the explicit allocation of capital as, in common with standard industry practice, this is not considered to be an appropriate or adequate mechanism for managing these risks. However, we recognise that a strong capital base can help to mitigate liquidity risk and we ensure that sufficient liquidity is held via the liquidity add-on process. Liquidity add-ons are required where an operating entity has identified a risk that is either not covered by the Group’s internal liquidity and funding risk management framework as a result of the review of risk completeness or not covered sufficiently by the Group’s internal liquidity and funding risk management framework (‘LFRF’) as a result of stress testing.
Our primary sources of funding are customer current accounts and customer savings deposits payable on demand or at short notice. We issue wholesale securities (secured and unsecured) to supplement our customer deposits and change the currency mix, maturity profile or location of our liabilities. In the normal course of business, we do not seek to utilise secured financing as a source of funding to finance customer assets, beyond the collateralised security financing activities within Global Markets.
Management of liquidity and funding risk
On 1 January 2016, the Group implemented a new liquidity and funding risk management framework. It uses the liquidity coverage ratio (‘LCR’) and net stable funding ratio (‘NSFR’) regulatory framework as a foundation, but adds extra metrics, limits and overlays to address firm-specific risks.
The LFRF is delivered using the following key aspects:
stand-alone management of liquidity and funding by operating entity;
operating entity classification by inherent liquidity risk (‘ILR’) categorisation;
minimum LCR requirement depending on ILR categorisation;
minimum NSFR requirement depending on ILR categorisation;
legal entity depositor concentration limit;
three-month and 12-month cumulative rolling term contractual maturity limits covering deposits from banks, deposits from non-bank financials and securities issued;
annual individual liquidity adequacy assessment (‘ILAA’) by operating entity;
minimum LCR requirement by currency;
intra-day liquidity; and
forward-looking funding assessments.


64
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

The new internal LFRF and the risk tolerance limits were approved by the RMM and the Board on the basis of recommendations made by the GRC.
Our ILAA process aims to:
identify risks that are not reflected in the LFRF and, where appropriate, to assess additional limits to be required locally; and
validate the risk tolerance at the operating entity level by demonstrating that reverse stress testing scenarios are acceptably remote and that vulnerabilities have been assessed through the use of severe stress scenarios.
Details of our Liquidity and Funding Risk parameters are provided from page 108 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Reputational risk
Reputational risk relates to stakeholders’ perceptions, whether fact-based or otherwise. Stakeholders’ expectations change constantly and so reputational risk is dynamic and varies between geographical regions, groups and individuals. We have an unwavering commitment to operating at the high standards we set for ourselves in every jurisdiction. Any lapse in standards of integrity, compliance, customer service or operating efficiency represents a potential reputational risk. We have taken, and are taking, measures to address the requirements of the US DPA and enhance our AML, sanctions and other regulatory compliance frameworks. These measures should also enhance our reputational risk management in the future.
For further details on reputational risk management, see page 116 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.
Sustainability risk
Sustainability risk arises from the provision of financial services to companies or projects which indirectly result in unacceptable impacts on people or on the environment.
Sustainability risk is:
measured by assessing the potential sustainability effect of a customer’s activities and assigning a Sustainability Risk Rating to all high-risk transactions;
monitored quarterly by the RMM and monthly by the Group’s Sustainability Risk function; and
managed using sustainability risk policies covering project finance lending and sector-based sustainability policies for sectors and themes with potentially large environmental or social impacts.
Business risk
The PRA specifies that banks, as part of their ICAAP, should review their exposure to business risk.
Business risk is the potential negative effect on profits and capital from the Group not meeting our strategic objectives, as a result of unforeseen changes in the business and regulatory environment, exposure to economic cycles and technological changes.
We manage and mitigate business risk through our risk appetite, business planning and stress testing processes, so that our business model and planned activities are monitored, resourced and capitalised consistent with the commercial, economic and risk environment in which the Group operates, and that any potential vulnerabilities of our business plans are identified at an early stage so that mitigating actions can be taken.
 
Dilution risk
Dilution risk is the risk that an amount receivable is reduced through cash or non-cash credit to the obligor, and arises mainly from factoring and invoice discounting transactions.
Where there is recourse to the seller, we treat these transactions as loans secured by the collateral of the debts purchased and do not report dilution risk for them. For our non-recourse portfolio, we do not report any dilution risk, as we obtain an indemnity from the seller that indemnifies us against this risk. Moreover, factoring transactions involve lending at a discount to the face-value of the receivables which provides protection against dilution risk.
Details of our management of these risks may be found on the following pages of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016: liquidity and funding 108, reputational 116 and sustainability 117.



Remuneration
Details of the Group’s remuneration policy, including details on the remuneration committee membership, activities, our remuneration strategy and tables showing the remuneration details of HSBC’s Identified Staff and Material Risk Takers may be found under the Remuneration Policy on our website (www.hsbc.com/investor-relations/governance) and the Directors’ Remuneration Report on page 191 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2016.



HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
65


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Appendix I
Additional CRD IV and BCBS tables
Table 46 sets out IRB exposures by obligor grade for central governments and central banks, institutions and corporates, all of which are assessed using our 23-grade CRR master scale. We benchmark the master scale against the ratings of external rating agencies. Each CRR band is associated with an external rating grade by reference to long-run default rates for that grade, represented by the average of issuer-weighted historical default rates.
 
The correspondence between the agency long-run default rates and the PD ranges of our master scale is obtained by matching a smoothed curve based on those default rates with our master scale reference PDs. This association between internal and external ratings is indicative and may vary over time. In these tables, the ratings of S&P are cited for illustration purposes, although we also benchmark against other agencies’ ratings in an equivalent manner.

Table 46.a: Wholesale IRB exposure – by obligor grade – Central governments and central banks
 
CRR

PD range

Average exposure value1

Undrawn commitments

Mapped external rating
 
 
%

$bn

$bn

 
Default risk
 
 
 
 
 
Minimal
0.1

0.000 to 0.010

159.4

0.8

AAA
 
1.1

0.011 to 0.028

106.4

0.4

AA+ to AA
 
1.2

0.029 to 0.053

37.1

0.5

AA- to A+
Low
2.1

0.054 to 0.095

12.2

0.1

A
 
2.2

0.096 to 0.169

10.3

0.1

A-
Satisfactory
3.1

0.170 to 0.285

3.9


BBB+
 
3.2

0.286 to 0.483

2.4


BBB
 
3.3

0.484 to 0.740

6.2


BBB-
Fair
4.1

0.741 to 1.022

0.2


BB+
 
4.2

1.023 to 1.407

1.0


BB
 
4.3

1.408 to 1.927

1.2

0.1

BB-
Moderate
5.1

1.928 to 2.620

2.5


BB-
 
5.2

2.621 to 3.579

2.3


B+
 
5.3

3.580 to 4.914

0.9


B
Significant
6.1

4.915 to 6.718

0.1


B
 
6.2

6.719 to 8.860

0.4


B-
High
7.1

8.861 to 11.402

0.2


CCC+
 
7.2

11.403 to 15.000



CCC+
Special Management
8.1

15.001 to 22.000



CCC+
 
8.2

22.001 to 50.000



CCC+
 
8.3

50.001 to 99.999



CCC to C
Default
9/10

100.000



Default
At 31 Dec 2016
 
 
346.7

2.0

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Default risk
 
 
 
 
 
Minimal
0.1

0.000 to 0.010

131.3

0.6

AAA
 
1.1

0.011 to 0.028

86.6

1.0

AA+ to AA
 
1.2

0.029 to 0.053

54.0

0.4

AA- to A+
Low
2.1

0.054 to 0.095

25.9


A
 
2.2

0.096 to 0.169

6.7


A-
Satisfactory
3.1

0.170 to 0.285

10.6


BBB+
 
3.2

0.286 to 0.483

4.6


BBB
 
3.3

0.484 to 0.740

2.0


BBB-
Fair
4.1

0.741 to 1.022

1.0


BB+
 
4.2

1.023 to 1.407

0.5


BB
 
4.3

1.408 to 1.927

0.5


BB-
Moderate
5.1

1.928 to 2.620

2.9

0.3

BB-
 
5.2

2.621 to 3.579

0.5

0.2

B+
 
5.3

3.580 to 4.914

3.5

0.1

B
Significant
6.1

4.915 to 6.718

0.4


B
 
6.2

6.719 to 8.860

0.3


B-
High
7.1

8.861 to 11.402

0.6


CCC+
 
7.2

11.403 to 15.000



CCC+
Special Management
8.1

15.001 to 22.000



CCC+
 
8.2

22.001 to 50.000



CCC+
 
8.3

50.001 to 99.999



CCC to C
Default
9/10

100.000

 
 
Default
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
331.9

2.6

 
For footnote, see page 68.

66
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 46.b: Wholesale IRB exposure – by obligor grade – Institutions
 
CRR

PD range

Average exposure value1

Undrawn commitments

Mapped external rating
 
 
%

$bn

$bn

 
Default risk
 
 
 
 
 
Minimal
0.1

0.000 to 0.010

2.0

0.1

AAA
 
1.1

0.011 to 0.028

16.2

2.0

AA+ to AA
 
1.2

0.029 to 0.053

28.2

5.4

AA-
Low
2.1

0.054 to 0.095

15.1

4.8

A+ to A
 
2.2

0.096 to 0.169

10.1

4.0

A-
Satisfactory
3.1

0.170 to 0.285

2.5

2.0

BBB+
 
3.2

0.286 to 0.483

3.3

0.6

BBB
 
3.3

0.484 to 0.740

2.1

0.2

BBB-
Fair
4.1

0.741 to 1.022

1.2

0.8

BB+
 
4.2

1.023 to 1.407

0.4

0.2

BB
 
4.3

1.408 to 1.927

0.1

0.1

BB-
Moderate
5.1

1.928 to 2.620

0.1


BB-
 
5.2

2.621 to 3.579



B+
 
5.3

3.580 to 4.914

0.1


B
Significant
6.1

4.915 to 6.718



B-
 
6.2

6.719 to 8.860



B-
High
7.1

8.861 to 11.402



CCC+
 
7.2

11.403 to 15.000



CCC+
Special Management
8.1

15.001 to 22.000


0.1

CCC
 
8.2

22.001 to 50.000


0.1

CCC- to CC
 
8.3

50.001 to 99.999



C
Default
9/10

100.000



Default
At 31 Dec 2016
 
 
81.4

20.4

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Default risk
 
 
 
 
 
Minimal
0.1

0.000 to 0.010

2.2

0.1

AAA
 
1.1

0.011 to 0.028

15.0

1.3

AA+ to AA
 
1.2

0.029 to 0.053

28.8

3.8

AA-
Low
2.1

0.054 to 0.095

36.4

5.0

A+ to A
 
2.2

0.096 to 0.169

11.9

3.5

A-
Satisfactory
3.1

0.170 to 0.285

7.8

1.4

BBB+
 
3.2

0.286 to 0.483

4.9

0.4

BBB
 
3.3

0.484 to 0.740

3.3

0.5

BBB-
Fair
4.1

0.741 to 1.022

0.9

0.2

BB+
 
4.2

1.023 to 1.407

1.7

0.2

BB
 
4.3

1.408 to 1.927

0.4


BB-
Moderate
5.1

1.928 to 2.620

0.3

0.1

BB-
 
5.2

2.621 to 3.579

0.1

 
B+
 
5.3

3.580 to 4.914

0.3


B
Significant
6.1

4.915 to 6.718

0.3


B-
 
6.2

6.719 to 8.860



B-
High
7.1

8.861 to 11.402

0.2


CCC+
 
7.2

11.403 to 15.000



CCC+
Special Management
8.1

15.001 to 22.000



CCC
 
8.2

22.001 to 50.000



CCC- to CC
 
8.3

50.001 to 99.999



C
Default
9/10

100.000

 
 
Default
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
114.5

16.5

 
For footnote, see page 68.


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
67


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Table 46.c: Wholesale IRB exposure – by obligor grade – Corporates²
 
 
CRR

PD range

Average exposure value1

Undrawn commitments

Mapped external rating
 
 
 
%

$bn

$bn

 
 
Default risk
 
 
 
 
 
 
Minimal
0.1

0.000 to 0.010


0.1

 
 
 
1.1

0.011 to 0.028

17.6

12.8

AAA to AA
 
 
1.2

0.029 to 0.053

46.1

36.7

AA-
 
Low
2.1

0.054 to 0.095

63.9

54.0

A+ to A
 
 
2.2

0.096 to 0.169

77.5

67.3

A-
 
Satisfactory
3.1

0.170 to 0.285

75.0

63.5

BBB+
 
 
3.2

0.286 to 0.483

73.3

58.1

BBB
 
 
3.3

0.484 to 0.740

66.6

44.0

BBB-
 
Fair
4.1

0.741 to 1.022

45.3

30.8

BB+
 
 
4.2

1.023 to 1.407

34.0

21.0

BB
 
 
4.3

1.408 to 1.927

31.6

18.6

BB-
 
Moderate
5.1

1.928 to 2.620

25.9

14.2

BB-
 
 
5.2

2.621 to 3.579

12.8

8.8

B+
 
 
5.3

3.580 to 4.914

10.7

7.2

B
 
Significant
6.1

4.915 to 6.718

7.0

6.1

B-
 
 
6.2

6.719 to 8.860

4.2

2.6

B-
 
High
7.1

8.861 to 11.402

2.6

0.9

CCC+
 
 
7.2

11.403 to 15.000

0.9

0.3

CCC+
 
Special Management
8.1

15.001 to 22.000

1.7

2.6

CCC
 
 
8.2

22.001 to 50.000

0.7

0.5

CCC- to CC
 
 
8.3

50.001 to 99.999

0.3

0.2

C
 
Default
9/10

100.000

7.4

0.9

Default
 
At 31 Dec 2016
 
 
605.1

451.2

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Default risk
 
 
 
 
 
 
Minimal
0.1

0.000 to 0.010



 
 
 
1.1

0.011 to 0.028

11.8

15.9

AAA to AA
 
 
1.2

0.029 to 0.053

48.1

37.9

AA-
 
Low
2.1

0.054 to 0.095

69.5

57.8

A+ to A
 
 
2.2

0.096 to 0.169

89.4

68.3

A-
 
Satisfactory
3.1

0.170 to 0.285

79.7

59.5

BBB+
 
 
3.2

0.286 to 0.483

73.1

54.4

BBB
 
 
3.3

0.484 to 0.740

70.5

44.8

BBB-
 
Fair
4.1

0.741 to 1.022

45.9

26.2

BB+
 
 
4.2

1.023 to 1.407

37.4

23.7

BB
 
 
4.3

1.408 to 1.927

31.6

18.7

BB-
 
Moderate
5.1

1.928 to 2.620

24.0

17.3

BB-
 
 
5.2

2.621 to 3.579

12.5

8.6

B+
 
 
5.3

3.580 to 4.914

11.9

8.0

B
 
Significant
6.1

4.915 to 6.718

5.3

4.4

B-
 
 
6.2

6.719 to 8.860

3.0

1.4

B-
 
High
7.1

8.861 to 11.402

2.1

1.2

CCC+
 
 
7.2

11.403 to 15.000

0.9

0.5

CCC+
 
Special Management
8.1

15.001 to 22.000

0.8

0.5

CCC
 
 
8.2

22.001 to 50.000

0.4

0.2

CCC- to CC
 
 
8.3

50.001 to 99.999

0.3

0.1

C
 
Default
9/10

100.000

6.8

1.0

Default
 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
625.0

450.4

 
1
Average exposures are calculated by aggregating the exposure value of the last five quarters and dividing by five.
2
Corporates excludes specialised lending exposures subject to supervisory slotting approach.



68
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country
The following tables set out the exposure-weighted average PD, exposure-weighted average LGD, RWAs and exposure by the
 
location of the principal operations of the lending subsidiary or branch.

 
 
 
 
 
 
Table 47.a: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country – wholesale IRB advanced approach all asset classes¹
 
 
Exposure-
weighted
average PD

Exposure-
weighted
average LGD

RWAs

Exposure
value

 
At 31 Dec 2016
%

%

$bn

$bn

 
Europe
 
 
 
 
 
– UK 
2.18

35.4

79.6

170.9

 
– France
2.98

30.5

12.6

28.7

 
– Germany
0.24

42.1

0.3

1.1

 
– Switzerland
0.02

43.7

0.7

13.0

 
Asia
 
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
0.73

41.1

80.6

285.8

 
– Australia
0.81

43.1

7.6

20.7

 
– India
1.15

55.0

8.4

17.8

 
– Indonesia
7.46

52.7

4.8

6.2

 
– Mainland China
0.87

48.1

25.2

67.4

 
– Malaysia
1.09

46.7

6.1

13.2

 
– Singapore
0.70

42.3

9.2

35.6

 
– Taiwan
0.19

48.0

3.0

15.2

 
Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
 
– Egypt
2.25

45.0

2.7

3.1

 
– Turkey
0.37

45.1

0.5

1.2

 
– UAE
0.14

36.6

1.8

11.2

 
North America
 
 
 
 
 
– US
1.51

35.7

50.8

144.1

 
– Canada
1.89

33.7

20.9

50.6

 
Latin America
 
 
 
 
 
– Argentina
2.25

45.3

1.6

1.5

 
– Brazil




 
– Mexico
0.90

44.5

2.6

7.0

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
 
 
 
Europe
 
 
 
 
 
– UK
2.31

30.5

87.5

209.4

 
– France
3.48

31.4

12.4

28.8

 
– Germany
0.41

41.9

0.3

1.3

 
– Switzerland
0.02

42.8

0.8

15.5

 
Asia
 
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
0.62

41.7

74.0

262.4

 
– Australia
1.05

42.7

7.1

19.2

 
– India
1.03

54.0

9.3

17.0

 
– Indonesia
7.98

54.5

5.5

6.6

 
– Mainland China
0.92

46.5

28.7

69.6

 
– Malaysia
0.98

47.1

6.4

14.6

 
– Singapore
0.64

42.7

8.7

34.5

 
– Taiwan
0.24

47.9

3.8

16.6

 
Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
 
– Egypt
2.14

45.0

5.2

5.3

 
– Turkey
0.79

45.1

1.1

1.5

 
– UAE
0.12

39.0

1.9

10.7

 
North America
 
 
 
 
 
– US
0.78

39.2

52.6

139.6

 
– Canada
1.83

38.4

21.7

50.0

 
Latin America
 
 
 
 
 
– Argentina
7.11

45.5

2.8

1.7

 
– Brazil
0.48

45.0

6.0

9.5

 
– Mexico
1.44

44.5

2.8

7.5

1
Excludes specialised lending exposures subject to supervisory slotting approach.



HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
69


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 47.b: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country – wholesale IRB advanced approach central governments and central banks
 
Exposure-
weighted
average PD

Exposure-
weighted
average LGD

RWAs

Exposure
value

At 31 Dec 2016
%

%

$bn

$bn

Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK 
0.04

44.6

2.5

20.10

– France
0.06

45.0

0.2

1.80

– Germany
0.05

45.0

0.1

0.50

– Switzerland
0.01

45.0

0.5

11.70

Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
0.01

44.5

5.5

111.90

– Australia
0.01

45.0

0.3

5.90

– India
0.07

45.0

1.4

6.10

– Indonesia
0.17

45.0

0.5

1.80

– Mainland China
0.02

45.0

1.9

26.10

– Malaysia
0.04

45.0

0.7

5.20

– Singapore
0.01

45.0

0.7

14.30

– Taiwan
0.02

45.0

0.5

8.90

Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt
2.95

45.0

2.4

2.20

– Turkey
0.44

45.0

0.4

0.80

– UAE
0.14

44.6

0.8

6.00

North America
 
 
 
 
– US
0.01

37.6

3.9

53.60

– Canada
0.02

31.4

2.1

16.60

Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina
2.23

45.0

1.5

1.50

– Brazil




– Mexico
0.08

45.0

2.2

6.20

 
 
 
 
 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
 
 
Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK
0.06

45.0

2.2

16.4

– France
0.05

45.1

0.3

2.3

– Germany
0.10

45.0

0.1

0.6

– Switzerland
0.01

45.0

0.6

13.9

Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
0.02

45.0

6.4

105.8

– Australia
0.01

45.0

0.3

5.7

– India
0.13

45.0

2.2

6.3

– Indonesia
0.31

45.0

0.6

1.4

– Mainland China
0.04

45.0

2.7

21.4

– Malaysia
0.05

45.0

0.8

5.4

– Singapore
0.01

45.0

0.5

13.0

– Taiwan
0.02

45.0

0.6

9.7

Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt
2.34

45.0

4.7

4.3

– Turkey
0.68

45.0

0.9

1.3

– UAE
0.05

45.0

0.6

5.8

North America
 
 
 
 
– US
0.01

45.1

5.5

45.6

– Canada
0.02

45.1

2.7

15.9

Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina
7.09

45.0

2.7

1.7

– Brazil
0.37

45.0

4.3

7.8

– Mexico
0.10

45.0

2.5

6.8



70
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 47.c: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country – wholesale IRB advanced approach institutions
 
Exposure-
weighted
average PD

Exposure-
weighted
average LGD

RWAs

Exposure
value

At 31 Dec 2016
%

%

$bn

$bn

Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK 
0.24

31.6

2.2

10.4

– France
0.17

41.3

0.6

1.6

– Germany
0.16

39.0

0.1

0.5

– Switzerland
0.04

32.1

0.2

1.3

Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
0.06

42.2

4.9

30.9

– Australia
0.05

41.0

0.5

2.8

– India
0.26

45.0

0.3

0.8

– Indonesia




– Mainland China
0.12

45.2

1.8

8.1

– Malaysia
0.38

48.5

0.4

0.9

– Singapore
0.08

43.9

0.7

4.9

– Taiwan
0.10

45.0

0.1

0.3

Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt
0.08

45.0

0.1

0.3

– Turkey
0.07

45.0

0.0

0.3

– UAE
0.08

45.4

0.2

0.9

North America
 
 
 

– US
0.31

42.4

1.0

2.5

– Canada
0.04

21.6

0.3

2.6

Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina
0.06

45.0



– Brazil




– Mexico
0.50

45.0

0.3

0.4

 
 
 
 
 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
 
 
Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK
0.35

21.3

3.2

21.0

– France
0.25

41.9

0.7

1.6

– Germany
0.10

38.1

0.2

0.6

– Switzerland
0.05

23.2

0.2

1.6

Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
0.06

42.7

4.3

29.6

– Australia
0.06

34.1

0.5

2.7

– India
0.18

45.2

0.2

0.6

– Indonesia




– Mainland China
0.12

45.6

1.9

8.6

– Malaysia
0.27

47.5

0.4

1.2

– Singapore
0.08

44.0

0.8

5.5

– Taiwan
0.08

45.0

0.1

0.5

Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt
0.08

45.0

0.1

0.5

– Turkey
2.25

45.0

0.1

0.1

– UAE
0.09

46.5

0.1

0.3

North America
 
 
 
 
– US
0.23

41.0

2.0

5.2

– Canada
0.06

28.2

0.3

2.3

Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil
0.97

45.1

1.7

1.7

– Mexico
0.26

45.0

0.2

0.3





HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
71


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


 
 
 
 
 
 
Table 47.d: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country – wholesale IRB advanced approach corporates¹
 
 
Exposure-
weighted
average PD

Exposure-
weighted
average LGD

RWAs

Exposure
value1

 
At 31 Dec 2016
%

%

$bn

$bn

 
Europe
 
 
 
 
 
– UK 
2.63

34.3

74.9

140.4

 
– France
3.36

28.8

11.8

25.3

 
– Germany
2.71

45.4

0.1

0.1

 
– Switzerland




 
Asia
 
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
1.43

38.1

70.2

143.0

 
– Australia
1.38

42.7

6.8

12.0

 
– India
1.82

61.3

6.7

10.9

 
– Indonesia
10.48

55.8

4.3

4.4

 
– Mainland China
1.71

51.3

21.5

33.2

 
– Malaysia
1.94

47.7

5.0

7.1

 
– Singapore
1.49

39.5

7.8

16.4

 
– Taiwan
0.45

52.7

2.4

6.0

 
Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
 
– Egypt
0.64

44.9

0.2

0.6

 
– Turkey
0.77

46.2

0.1

0.1

 
– UAE
0.16

23.9

0.8

4.3

 
North America
 
 
 
 
 
– US
2.45

34.4

45.9

88.0

 
– Canada
3.02

35.9

18.5

31.4

 
Latin America
 
 
 
 
 
– Argentina
3.10

59.2

0.1


 
– Brazil




 
– Mexico
15.62

34.7

0.1

0.4

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
 
 
 
Europe
 
 
 
 
 
– UK
2.77

30.2

82.1

172.0

 
– France
4.00

29.4

11.4

24.9

 
– Germany
0.77

47.7


0.1

 
– Switzerland




 
Asia
 
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
1.25

38.7

63.3

127.0

 
– Australia
1.85

43.7

6.3

10.8

 
– India
1.63

60.0

6.9

10.1

 
– Indonesia
10.04

57.0

4.9

5.2

 
– Mainland China
1.56

47.5

24.1

39.6

 
– Malaysia
1.72

48.4

5.2

8.0

 
– Singapore
1.34

40.3

7.4

16.0

 
– Taiwan
0.57

52.4

3.1

6.4

 
Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
 
– Egypt
2.58

45.2

0.4

0.5

 
– Turkey
0.73

45.7

0.1

0.1

 
– UAE
0.20

30.8

1.2

4.6

 
North America
 
 
 
 
 
– US
1.21

36.1

45.1

88.8

 
– Canada
2.86

35.8

18.7

31.8

 
Latin America
 
 
 
 
 
– Argentina
8.84

80.8

0.1


 
– Brazil




 
– Mexico
22.57

37.0

0.1

0.4

1
Excludes specialised lending exposures subject to supervisory slotting approach.



72
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 47.e: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country – wholesale IRB foundation approach all asset classes
 
Exposure-
weighted
average PD

Exposure-
weighted
average LGD

RWAs

Exposure
value

At 31 Dec 2016
%

%

$bn

$bn

Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK 
1.94

41.3

4.4

8.2

– France
4.30

45.0

0.2

0.3

– Germany
0.90

44.8

10.1

15.6

– Switzerland




Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong




– Australia




– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia




– Singapore




– Taiwan




Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE
3.72

44.2

7.8

12.8

North America
 
 
 
 
– US




– Canada




Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico




 
 
 
 
 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
 
 
Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK
2.22

41.4

5.2

8.9

– France
5.36

45.0

0.2

0.2

– Germany
1.04

44.7

10.5

16.2

– Switzerland




Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong




– Australia




– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia




– Singapore




– Taiwan




Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE
2.44

44.2

8.1

12.4

North America
 
 
 
 
– US




– Canada




Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico





HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
73


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 47.f: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country – wholesale IRB foundation approach central governments and central banks
 
Exposure-
weighted
average PD

Exposure-
weighted
average LGD

RWAs

Exposure
value

At 31 Dec 2016
%

%

$bn

$bn

Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK 




– France




– Germany




– Switzerland




Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong




– Australia




– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia




– Singapore




– Taiwan




Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE
0.04

45.0


0.1

North America
 
 
 
 
– US




– Canada




Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico




 
 
 
 
 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
 
 
Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK




– France




– Germany




– Switzerland




Asia
 

 
 
– Hong Kong




– Australia




– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia




– Singapore




– Taiwan




Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE
0.04

45.0


0.1

North America
 
 
 
 
– US




– Canada




Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico





74
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 47.g: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country – wholesale IRB foundation approach institutions
 
Exposure-
weighted
average PD

Exposure-
weighted
average LGD

RWAs

Exposure
value

At 31 Dec 2016
%

%

$bn

$bn

Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK 




– France




– Germany




– Switzerland




Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong




– Australia




– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia




– Singapore




– Taiwan




Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE
0.28

45.0

0.1

0.2

North America
 
 
 
 
– US




– Canada




Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico




 
 
 
 
 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
 
 
Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK




– France




– Germany




– Switzerland




Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong




– Australia




– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia




– Singapore




– Taiwan




Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE
0.29

45.0

0.1

0.3

North America
 
 
 
 
– US




– Canada




Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico





HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
75


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 47.h: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country – wholesale IRB foundation approach corporates
 
Exposure-
weighted
average PD

Exposure-
weighted
average LGD

RWAs

Exposure
value

At 31 Dec 2016
%

%

$bn

$bn

Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK 
1.94

41.3

4.4

8.2

– France
4.30

45.0

0.2

0.3

– Germany
0.91

44.8

10.1

15.6

– Switzerland




Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong




– Australia




– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia




– Singapore




– Taiwan




Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE
3.81

44.2

7.7

12.5

North America
 
 
 
 
– US




– Canada




Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico




 
 
 
 
 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
 
 
Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK
2.22

41.4

5.2

8.9

– France
5.36

45.0

0.2

0.2

– Germany
1.04

44.7

10.5

16.2

– Switzerland




Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong




– Australia




– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia




– Singapore




– Taiwan




Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE
2.50

44.2

8.0

12.0

North America
 
 
 
 
– US




– Canada




Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico





76
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 47.i: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country – retail IRB approach all asset classes
 
Exposure-
weighted
average PD

Exposure-
weighted
average LGD

RWAs

Exposure
value

At 31 Dec 2016
%

%

$bn

$bn

Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK 
1.58

30.5

18.6

155.8

– France
5.06

14.6

2.8

22.7

– Germany




– Switzerland
0.73

2.2

0.2

8.1

Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
0.87

39.2

20.2

102.3

– Australia
0.90

10.6

0.7

11.6

– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia
4.05

12.1

1.0

4.5

– Singapore
0.75

22.3

1.1

6.7

– Taiwan
1.20

11.5

0.5

4.1

Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE




North America
 
 
 
 
– US
9.67

67.3

18.5

29.8

– Canada
0.96

19.2

2.4

18.7

Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico




 
 
 
 
 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
 
 
Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK
1.58

30.8

21.8

182.7

– France
5.61

15.1

3.1

23.7

– Germany




– Switzerland
0.80

2.7

0.3

10.1

Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
0.94

39.0

18.2

97.5

– Australia
0.84

10.9

0.6

10.7

– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia
3.57

12.3

1.0

4.7

– Singapore
0.69

21.2

1.4

8.2

– Taiwan
1.21

11.2

0.4

3.9

Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE




North America
 
 
 
 
– US
12.05

64.0

43.7

42.1

– Canada
1.04

19.8

2.4

18.0

Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico





HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
77


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


 
 
 
 
 
 
Table 47.j: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country – retail IRB approach – retail secured by mortgages on immovable property
non-SME
 
 
Exposure-
weighted
average PD

Exposure-
weighted
average LGD

RWAs

Exposure
value

 
At 31 Dec 2016
%

%

$bn

$bn

 
Europe
 
 
 
 
 
– UK 
1.33

12.2

5.4

114.9

 
– France
6.82

14.0

0.6

3.5

 
– Germany




 
– Switzerland




 
Asia
 
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
0.69

10.0

10.7

62.5

 
– Australia
0.90

10.6

0.7

11.6

 
– India




 
– Indonesia




 
– Mainland China




 
– Malaysia
4.05

12.1

1.0

4.5

 
– Singapore
0.75

22.3

1.1

6.7

 
– Taiwan
1.20

11.5

0.5

4.1

 
Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




 
– Turkey




 
– UAE




 
North America
 
 
 
 
 
– US
11.01

59.5

14.6

23.3

 
– Canada
0.85

17.2

1.9

16.7

 
Latin America
 
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




 
– Brazil




 
– Mexico




 
 
 
 
 
 
 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
 
 
 
Europe
 
 
 
 
 
– UK
1.32

12.5

7.1

134.2

 
– France
7.21

13.5

0.4

2.5

 
– Germany




 
– Switzerland




 
Asia
 
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
0.76

10.0

8.9

59.7

 
– Australia
0.84

10.9

0.6

10.7

 
– India




 
– Indonesia




 
– Mainland China




 
– Malaysia
3.57

12.3

1.0

4.7

 
– Singapore
0.69

21.2

1.4

8.2

 
– Taiwan
1.21

11.2

0.4

3.9

 
Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




 
– Turkey




 
– UAE




 
North America
 
 
 
 
 
– US
13.68

58.1

38.2

34.3

 
– Canada
0.93

17.5

1.8

15.8

 
Latin America
 
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




 
– Brazil




 
– Mexico






78
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 47.k: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country – retail IRB approach retail secured by mortgages on immovable property SME
 
Exposure-
weighted
average PD

Exposure-
weighted
average LGD

RWAs

Exposure
value

At 31 Dec 2016
%

%

$bn

$bn

Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK 




– France
7.70

25.8

0.2

0.6

– Germany




– Switzerland




Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
0.89

11.7


0.6

– Australia




– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia




– Singapore




– Taiwan




Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE




North America
 
 
 
 
– US




– Canada
2.10

29.6

0.1

0.3

Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico




 
 
 
 
 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
 
 
Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK




– France
8.01

18.8

0.5

2.0

– Germany




– Switzerland




Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
0.99

11.1


0.6

– Australia




– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia




– Singapore




– Taiwan




Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE




North America
 
 
 
 
– US




– Canada
2.21

30.7

0.1

0.3

Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico





HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
79


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 47.l: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country – retail IRB approach retail QRRE
 
Exposure-
weighted
average PD

Exposure-
weighted
average LGD

RWAs

Exposure
value

At 31 Dec 2016
%

%

$bn

$bn

Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK 
1.14

85.5

5.4

28.0

– France




– Germany




– Switzerland




Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
1.10

100.0

8.1

32.2

– Australia




– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia




– Singapore




– Taiwan




Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE




North America
 
 
 
 
– US
1.49

93.6

1.0

3.4

– Canada
2.72

60.7

0.1

0.3

Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico




 
 
 
 
 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
 
 
Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK
1.17

85.2

6.1

33.2

– France




– Germany




– Switzerland




Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
1.11

100.1

8.0

30.6

– Australia




– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia




– Singapore




– Taiwan




Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE




North America
 
 
 
 
– US
1.49

93.7

1.0

3.6

– Canada
2.91

61.2

0.1

0.4

Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico





80
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 47.m: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country – retail IRB approach other SME
 
Exposure-
weighted
average PD

Exposure-
weighted
average LGD

RWAs

Exposure
value

At 31 Dec 2016
%

%

$bn

$bn

Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK 
7.71

66.6

3.8

6.1

– France
20.34

30.6

0.7

2.3

– Germany




– Switzerland




Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
0.10

11.3


0.1

– Australia




– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia




– Singapore




– Taiwan




Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE




North America
 
 
 
 
– US




– Canada
4.33

48.4

0.1

0.2

Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico




 
 
 
 
 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
 
 
Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK
7.07

66.0

4.7

8.1

– France
16.46

26.5

0.9

3.5

– Germany




– Switzerland




Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
0.13

10.8


0.1

– Australia




– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia




– Singapore




– Taiwan




Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE




North America
 
 
 
 
– US
1.82

95.7

0.1

0.1

– Canada
4.31

47.3

0.1

0.2

Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico





HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
81


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 47.n: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country – retail IRB approach other non-SME
 
Exposure-
weighted
average PD

Exposure-
weighted
average LGD

RWAs

Exposure
value

At 31 Dec 2016
%

%

$bn

$bn

Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK 
2.05

81.8

4.0

6.8

– France
2.46

12.1

1.3

16.3

– Germany




– Jersey
0.52

2.6

1.1

0.0

– Switzerland
0.73

2.2

0.2

8.1

Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
1.37

21.2

1.4

6.9

– Australia




– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia




– Singapore




– Taiwan




Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE




North America
 
 
 
 
– US
8.66

96.5

2.9

3.1

– Canada
1.03

28.3

0.2

1.2

Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico




 
 
 
 
 
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
 
 
Europe
 
 
 
 
– UK
2.18

83.2

3.9

7.1

– France
2.63

12.4

1.3

15.7

– Germany




– Switzerland
0.80

2.7

0.3

10.1

Asia
 
 
 
 
– Hong Kong
1.85

21.1

1.3

6.5

– Australia




– India




– Indonesia




– Mainland China




– Malaysia




– Singapore




– Taiwan




Middle East and North Africa
 
 
 
 
– Egypt




– Turkey




– UAE




North America
 
 
 
 
– US
8.11

85.7

4.4

4.1

– Canada
0.99

28.1

0.3

1.3

Latin America
 
 
 
 
– Argentina




– Brazil




– Mexico




1
Excludes specialised lending exposures subject to supervisory slotting approach.

82
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 48: Retail IRB exposure – by internal PD band
 
   PD range
Average exposure value1

Undrawn commitments

 
   %
$bn

$bn

At 31 Dec 2016
 
 
 
Secured by mortgages on immovable property
 
 
 
SME
 
2.4

0.1

Band 1
0.000 to 0.483
0.5


Band 2
0.484 to 1.022
0.4

0.1

Band 3
1.023 to 4.914
1.0


Band 4
4.915 to 8.860
0.2


Band 5
8.861 to 15.000
0.1


Band 6
15.001 to 50.000
0.1


Band 7
50.001 to 100.000
0.1


Secured by mortgages on immovable property
 
 
 
Non-SME
 
263.9

16.7

Band 1
0.000 to 0.483
207.4

14.9

Band 2
0.484 to 1.022
22.5

1.0

Band 3
1.023 to 4.914
21.1

0.7

Band 4
4.915 to 8.860
4.7


Band 5
8.861 to 15.000
1.0


Band 6
15.001 to 50.000
2.0

0.1

Band 7
50.001 to 100.000
5.2


Qualifying revolving retail exposures
 
65.7

95.8

Band 1
0.000 to 0.483
47.8

83.3

Band 2
0.484 to 1.022
6.9

6.5

Band 3
1.023 to 4.914
8.7

5.3

Band 4
4.915 to 8.860
1.2

0.4

Band 5
8.861 to 15.000
0.4

0.1

Band 6
15.001 to 50.000
0.5

0.1

Band 7
50.001 to 100.000
0.2

0.1

Other SME
 
10.5

3.5

Band 1
0.000 to 0.483
1.3

0.7

Band 2
0.484 to 1.022
1.8

0.9

Band 3
1.023 to 4.914
4.9

1.4

Band 4
4.915 to 8.860
1.1

0.3

Band 5
8.861 to 15.000
0.4

0.1

Band 6
15.001 to 50.000
0.3


Band 7
50.001 to 100.000
0.7

0.1

Other non-SME
 
45.5

14.5

Band 1
0.000 to 0.483
26.4

11.6

Band 2
0.484 to 1.022
6.9

1.4

Band 3
1.023 to 4.914
9.8

1.4

Band 4
4.915 to 8.860
0.9

0.1

Band 5
8.861 to 15.000
0.5


Band 6
15.001 to 50.000
0.4


Band 7
50.001 to 100.000
0.6


Total retail
 
388.0

130.6

Band 1
0.000 to 0.483
283.6

110.4

Band 2
0.484 to 1.022
38.4

9.9

Band 3
1.023 to 4.914
45.5

8.7

Band 4
4.915 to 8.860
8.2

0.8

Band 5
8.861 to 15.000
2.4

0.3

Band 6
15.001 to 50.000
3.1

0.3

Band 7
50.001 to 100.000
6.8

0.2


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
83


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 48: Retail IRB exposure – by internal PD band (continued)
 
   PD range
Average exposure
    value1

Undrawn
commitments

 
   %
$bn

$bn

At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
 
Secured by mortgages on immovable property
 
 
 
SME
 
3.0


Band 1
0.000 to 0.483
0.6


Band 2
0.484 to 1.022
0.5


Band 3
1.023 to 4.914
1.4


Band 4
4.915 to 8.860
0.2


Band 5
8.861 to 15.000
0.1


Band 6
15.001 to 50.000
0.1


Band 7
50.001 to 100.000
0.1


Secured by mortgages on immovable property
 
 
 
Non-SME
 
283.0

17.4

Band 1
0.000 to 0.483
218.9

16.2

Band 2
0.484 to 1.022
24.1

0.8

Band 3
1.023 to 4.914
23.1

0.3

Band 4
4.915 to 8.860
6.1


Band 5
8.861 to 15.000
1.5

0.1

Band 6
15.001 to 50.000
2.9


Band 7
50.001 to 100.000
6.4


Qualifying revolving retail exposures
   
67.0

98.4

Band 1
0.000 to 0.483
48.7

85.2

Band 2
0.484 to 1.022
6.8

6.7

Band 3
1.023 to 4.914
9.0

5.7

Band 4
4.915 to 8.860
1.3

0.5

Band 5
8.861 to 15.000
0.4

0.1

Band 6
15.001 to 50.000
0.5

0.1

Band 7
50.001 to 100.000
0.3

0.1

Other SME
 
12.9

4.2

Band 1
0.000 to 0.483
1.7

1.1

Band 2
0.484 to 1.022
2.2

1.0

Band 3
1.023 to 4.914
6.0

1.5

Band 4
4.915 to 8.860
1.4

0.2

Band 5
8.861 to 15.000
0.5

0.2

Band 6
15.001 to 50.000
0.3

0.1

Band 7
50.001 to 100.000
0.8

0.1

Other non-SME
 
46.5

14.2

Band 1
0.000 to 0.483
26.4

11.5

Band 2
0.484 to 1.022
6.7

1.3

Band 3
1.023 to 4.914
10.7

1.4

Band 4
4.915 to 8.860
0.9


Band 5
8.861 to 15.000
0.6


Band 6
15.001 to 50.000
0.5


Band 7
50.001 to 100.000
0.7


Total retail
 
412.4

134.2

Band 1
0.000 to 0.483
296.3

114.0

Band 2
0.484 to 1.022
40.3

9.8

Band 3
1.023 to 4.914
50.2

8.9

Band 4
4.915 to 8.860
9.9

0.7

Band 5
8.861 to 15.000
3.1

0.4

Band 6
15.001 to 50.000
4.3

0.2

Band 7
50.001 to 100.000
8.3

0.2

1
Average exposures are calculated by aggregating the exposure value of the last five quarters and dividing by five.



84
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 49: IRB expected loss and CRAs – by exposure class
 
 
CRA
 
Expected loss1

Balances

Charge
 for the year

 
$bn

$bn

$bn

IRB exposure classes
 
 
 
– central governments and central banks
0.1



– institutions



– corporates
5.7

4.3

1.1

– total retail
3.6

1.2

0.5

– of which:
 
 
 
secured by mortgages on immovable property SME



secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
1.9

0.4

0.1

qualifying revolving retail
0.6

0.2

0.2

other SME
0.6

0.3


other non-SME
0.5

0.3

0.2

At 31 Dec 2016
9.4

5.5

1.6

 
 
 
 
IRB exposure classes
 
 
 
– central governments and central banks
0.2



– institutions
0.1



– corporates
5.5

4.5

1.0

– total retail
5.5

2.1

0.4

– of which:
 
 
 
secured by mortgages on immovable property SME



secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
3.5

1.2


qualifying revolving retail
0.7

0.2

0.2

other SME
0.7

0.3


other non-SME
0.6

0.4

0.2

At 31 Dec 2015
11.3

6.6

1.4

 
 
 
 
IRB exposure classes
 
 
 
– central governments and central banks
0.3



– institutions
0.3



– corporates
5.2

4.2

1.1

– total retail
7.2

3.1

0.2

– of which:
 
 
 
secured by mortgages on immovable property SME



secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
5.1

1.9

(0.1
)
qualifying revolving retail
0.7

0.3

0.1

other SME
0.7

0.4


other non-SME
0.7

0.5

0.2

At 31 Dec 2014
13.0

7.3

1.3

1
Excludes securitisation exposures because EL is not calculated for this exposure class.
Table 50: IRB expected loss and CRAs – by region
 
 
CRA
 
Expected loss1

Balances

Charge
for the year

 
   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

Europe
3.5

2.2

0.4

Asia
2.4

1.4

0.5

Middle East and North Africa
0.3

0.3


North America
3.1

1.5

0.7

Latin America
0.1

0.1


At 31 Dec 2016
9.4

5.5

1.6

 
 
 
 
Europe
4.3

2.9

0.4

Asia
2.3

1.3

0.5

Middle East and North Africa
0.2

0.3

0.1

North America
4.4

2.0

0.4

Latin America
0.1

0.1


At 31 Dec 2015
11.3

6.6

1.4

1
Excludes securitisation exposures because EL is not calculated for this exposure class.



HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
85


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 51: IRB exposure – credit risk mitigation
 
 
At 31 Dec 2016
At 31 Dec 2015
 
 
Exposure value
  covered by credit
   derivatives
   or guarantees1

Total
exposure
value

Exposure value
covered by credit
derivatives
or guarantees1

Total
exposure
value

 
Footnote
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

Exposures under the IRB advanced approach
 
 
 
 
 
Central governments and central banks
 
0.1

339.4

0.5

327.4

Institutions
 
0.4

75.7

0.4

90.5

Corporates
 
83.4

583.1

86.4

597.3

Retail
 
20.2

366.8

20.3

404.5

Securitisation positions
 

33.8


40.9

Non-credit obligation assets
 

51.9


50.2

Total
 
 
1,450.7

 
1,510.8

Exposures under the IRB foundation approach
 
 
 
 
 
Central governments and central banks
 

0.1


0.1

Institutions
 

0.3


0.3

Corporates
2
0.9

42.4

0.5

43.3

1
Figures presented on an ‘obligor basis’.
2
The value of exposures under the IRB foundation approach covered by eligible financial and other collateral was $4.6bn (2015: $7.9bn).
Table 52: Standardised exposure – credit risk mitigation
 
 
2016
2015
 
 
Exposure value
covered
by eligible
financial
   and other
   collateral1

Exposure value
 covered by credit derivatives or guarantees1

Total exposure value

Exposure
value covered
   by eligible
   financial
   and other
   collateral1

   Exposure
   value covered
   by credit
   derivatives
or guarantees1

Total exposure value

 
Footnote
   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

Exposures under the standardised approach
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Central governments and central banks
 
0.1

5.0

167.3


0.2

199.9

Institutions
 

0.3

2.1


4.3

38.9

Corporates
 
13.4

6.1

78.4

14.5

5.0

226.4

Retail
 
2.3


22.0

0.7

0.1

44.2

Secured by mortgages on immovable property
 
5.0


25.7



40.3

Exposures in default
 
0.5


3.3



4.9

Regional governments or local authorities
 


2.9



2.8

Equity
 


15.2



7.0

Other
2


17.2



27.6

At 31 Dec
 
 
 
334.1

 
 
592.0

1
Figures presented on an ‘obligor basis’.
2
This includes the exposure class ‘other items’ with an exposure value of $9.5bn as well as other less material standardised exposure classes not individually shown above.

86
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 53: Standardised exposure – by credit quality step
 
At 31 Dec 2016
At 31 Dec 2015
 
   Original
exposure1

   Exposure
   value

   RWAs

   Original
   exposure1

   Exposure
   value

   RWAs

 
   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

   $bn

Central governments and central banks
 
 
 
 
 
 
Credit quality step 1
154.8

158.3

 
138.1

145.5

 
Credit quality step 2
1.3

1.6

 
1.4

1.9

 
Credit quality step 3
1.0

1.3

 
2.5

2.8

 
Credit quality step 4
0.3

0.1

 
0.4

0.1

 
Credit quality step 5
0.3

0.3

 


 
Credit quality step unrated
5.7

5.7

 
49.6

49.6

 
 
163.4

167.3

14.6

192.0

199.9

20.0

Institutions
 
 
 
 
 
 
Credit quality step 1
0.8

0.8

 
1.6

0.7

 
Credit quality step 2
0.6

0.3

 
4.7

1.4

 
Credit quality step 4
0.5

0.5

 


 
Credit quality step 5
0.1

0.1

 
0.1

0.1

 
Credit quality step unrated
0.3

0.3

 
36.8

36.7

 
 
2.3

2.0

0.9

43.2

38.9

14.7

Corporates
 
 
 
 
 
 
Credit quality step 1
2.0

2.2

 
1.6

0.8

 
Credit quality step 2
4.6

2.9

 
6.2

4.2

 
Credit quality step 3
2.6

1.7

 
2.7

1.4

 
Credit quality step 4
4.5

3.0

 
2.1

1.6

 
Credit quality step 5
1.0

0.5

 
1.3

0.8

 
Credit quality step 6
0.4

0.1

 
2.8

2.0

 
Credit quality step unrated
145.3

67.9

 
330.6

215.6

 
 
160.4

78.3

75.0

347.3

226.4

210.6

1
Figures presented on an ‘obligor basis’.


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
87


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Additional BCBS tables
Table 54: Changes in stock of defaulted loans and debt securities
 
 
 
 
 
a
 
 
Footnote
$bn

1

Defaulted loans and debt securities at end of the previous reporting period
 
22.7

2

Loans and debt securities that have defaulted since the last reporting period
 
8.6

3

Returned to non-defaulted status
 
(1.5
)
4

Amounts written off
 
(2.8
)
5

Other changes
1
(5.1
)
7

Repayments
 
(4.0
)
6

Defaulted loans and debt securities at end of the reporting period
 
17.9

1
Other changes include foreign exchange and assets held for sale in default.
Table 55: IRB – Credit risk exposures by portfolio and PD range
 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
AIRB – Central government and central banks
Original on-balance sheet gross exposure

Off-balance sheet exposures pre-CCF

Average CCF
EAD post-CRM and post-CCF

Average PD
Number of obligors

Average LGD
Average maturity

RWA

RWA density
EL

Individual impairments

Collective impairments

PD scale
$bn

$bn

%
$bn

%
 
%
yrs

$bn

%
$bn

$bn

$bn

0.00 to <0.15
326.6

1.9

60.5
327.7

0.02
417

42.9
2.05

26.0

8

 
 
0.15 to <0.25
2.2


27.5
2.3

0.22
19

43.9
1.48

0.8

37

 
 
0.25 to <0.50
2.0


42.3
2.0

0.37
33

43.5
1.36

0.9

49

 
 
0.50 to <0.75
0.5


50.1
0.5

0.63
15

45.0
1.49

0.4

69

 
 
0.75 to <2.50
3.7

0.1

26.7
3.7

1.35
35

45.0
1.27

3.4

91

 
 
2.50 to <10.00
3.2


76.5
3.2

3.49
20

45.0
1.07

3.9

123
0.1

 
 
10.00 to <100.00


50.2

10.00
4

47.0
0.55


189

 
 
100.00 (Default)



100.00
11

88.0
5.00



 
 
Sub-total
338.2

2.0

59.1
339.4

0.07
554

43.0
2.02

35.4

10
0.1



 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
AIRB – Institutions
Original on-balance sheet gross exposure

Off-balance sheet exposures pre-CCF

Average CCF
EAD post-CRM and post-CCF

Average PD
Number of obligors

Average LGD
Average maturity

RWA

RWA density
EL

Individual impairments

Collective impairments

PD scale
$bn

$bn

%
$bn

%
 
%
yrs

$bn

%
$bn

$bn

$bn

0.00 to <0.15
62.5

16.3

30.5
67.7

0.05
2,772

40.2
1.34

10.2

15

 
 
0.15 to <0.25
2.0

2.0

26.4
2.5

0.22
384

44.7
0.72

0.9

37

 
 
0.25 to <0.50
2.5

0.6

30.9
2.7

0.37
278

44.9
0.69

1.5

54

 
 
0.50 to <0.75
0.8

0.2

53.1
0.9

0.63
175

44.7
1.15

0.7

73

 
 
0.75 to <2.50
1.8

1.1

28.8
1.9

1.11
270

42.2
0.98

1.6

83

 
 
2.50 to <10.00


21.7

4.37
57

41.7
0.37


161

 
 
10.00 to <100.00

0.2

17.4

26.64
44

53.2
1.53

0.1

307

 
 
100.00 (Default)



100.00
5

45.0
2.54


295

 
 
Sub-total
69.6

20.4

30.1
75.7

0.12
3,985

40.6
1.29

15.0

20



 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
AIRB – Corporate – Specialised Lending – excluding Slotting
Original on-balance sheet gross exposure

Off-balance sheet exposures pre-CCF

Average CCF
EAD post-CRM and post-CCF

Average PD
Number of obligors

Average LGD
Average maturity

RWA

RWA density
EL

Individual impairments

Collective impairments

PD scale
$bn

$bn

%
$bn

%
 
%
yrs

$bn

%
$bn

$bn

$bn

0.00 to <0.15
0.9

0.4

62.7
1.2

0.13
614

26.5
3.43

0.3

27

 
 
0.15 to <0.25
0.9

0.3

45.5
1.0

0.22
659

25.4
3.85

0.4

36

 
 
0.25 to <0.50
0.4

0.1

58.4
0.4

0.37
296

30.7
3.73

0.2

52

 
 
0.50 to <0.75
0.4

0.1

31.0
0.4

0.63
250

26.0
4.29

0.2

58

 
 
0.75 to <2.50
0.7

0.5

34.5
0.9

1.25
523

40.2
3.63

0.9

105

 
 
2.50 to <10.00
0.1


56.5
0.1

3.57
91

26.2
4.99

0.1

102

 
 
10.00 to <100.00
0.1


62.0
0.1

18.58
114

27.2
1.56

0.2

134

 
 
100.00 (Default)
0.1


94.7
0.1

100.00
159

53.3
3.22


11
0.1

 
 
Sub-total
3.6

1.4

47.7
4.2

4.36
2,706

30.3
3.66

2.3

56
0.1

0.1



88
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
AIRB – Corporate – Other
Original on-balance sheet gross exposure

Off-balance sheet exposures pre-CCF

Average CCF
EAD post-CRM and post-CCF

Average PD
Number of obligors

Average LGD
Average maturity

RWA

RWA density
EL

Individual impairments

Collective impairments

PD scale
$bn

$bn

%
$bn

%
 
%
yrs

$bn

%
$bn

$bn

$bn

0.00 to <0.15
105.5

144.3

37.9
186.0

0.08
10,931

38.1
2.26

41.4

22
0.1

 
 
0.15 to <0.25
39.2

55.0

38.8
67.0

0.22
9,588

39.3
2.04

26.6

40
0.1

 
 
0.25 to <0.50
45.3

48.8

36.4
69.6

0.37
10,306

39.2
2.08

34.9

50
0.1

 
 
0.50 to <0.75
43.1

38.7

33.4
55.0

0.63
9,322

37.5
1.95

33.5

61
0.1

 
 
0.75 to <2.50
120.2

89.8

31.9
123.5

1.37
42,812

37.2
2.00

99.7

81
0.6

 
 
2.50 to <10.00
32.7

27.3

34.4
31.9

4.59
11,786

36.5
1.99

36.3

114
0.5

 
 
10.00 to <100.00
5.6

4.8

39.8
6.4

19.65
2,459

36.5
2.05

11.1

174
0.5

 
 
100.00 (Default)
6.0

0.8

51.5
6.4

100.00
2,583

41.9
2.24

6.0

93
2.5

 
 
Sub-total
397.6

409.5

36.2
545.8

2.15
99,787

38.1
2.10

289.5

53
4.5

2.3

1.1

 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
Wholesale AIRB – Total
Original on-balance sheet gross exposure

Off-balance sheet exposures pre-CCF

Average CCF
EAD post-CRM and post-CCF

Average PD
Number of obligors

Average LGD
Average maturity

RWA

RWA density
EL

Individual impairments

Collective impairments

PD scale
$bn

$bn

%
$bn

%
 
%
yrs

$bn

%
$bn

$bn

$bn

Total (all portfolios)
809.0

433.3

36.0
1,017.0

1.27
107,032

40.0
2.0

354.3

36
4.7

2.4

1.1

The Wholesale AIRB Total includes Non-credit obligation assets EAD post-CRM and post-CCF of $51.9bn and RWAs of $12.1bn.
 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
AIRB – Secured by mortgages on immovable property SME
Original on-balance sheet gross exposure

Off-balance sheet exposures pre-CCF

Average CCF
EAD post-CRM and post-CCF

Average PD
Number of obligors

Average LGD
Average maturity

RWA

RWA density
EL

Individual impairments

Collective impairments

PD scale
$bn

$bn

%
$bn

%
 
%
yrs

$bn

%
$bn

$bn

$bn

0.00 to <0.15
0.3


100.0
0.4

0.07
1,249

10.5


2

 
 
0.15 to <0.25
0.1


100.0
0.1

0.17
200

17.9


7

 
 
0.25 to <0.50
0.2


37.7
0.1

0.32
1,012

16.4


10

 
 
0.50 to <0.75
0.1

0.1

100.0
0.1

0.63
585

26.0


19

 
 
0.75 to <2.50
0.3


95.0
0.3

1.63
1,792

28.9

0.1

29

 
 
2.50 to <10.00
0.4


102.3
0.4

5.26
1,928

24.4

0.2

32

 
 
10.00 to <100.00
0.1


86.0
0.1

17.47
414

26.5


50

 
 
100.00 (Default)


97.8

100.00
138

26.2


48

 
 
Sub-total
1.5

0.1

97.7
1.5

4.01
7,318

21.1

0.3

21



 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
AIRB – Secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME
Original on-balance sheet gross exposure

Off-balance sheet exposures pre-CCF

Average CCF
EAD post-CRM and post-CCF

Average PD
Number of obligors

Average LGD
Average maturity

RWA

RWA density
EL

Individual impairments

Collective impairments

PD scale
$bn

$bn

%
$bn

%
 
%
yrs

$bn

%
$bn

$bn

$bn

0.00 to <0.15
137.7

11.5

92.3
151.4

0.06
900,158

14.1

8.0

5

 
 
0.15 to <0.25
24.4

1.1

81.0
25.5

0.21
106,945

16.5

2.7

11

 
 
0.25 to <0.50
22.0

2.3

43.8
23.1

0.37
120,044

22.0

4.6

20

 
 
0.50 to <0.75
12.0

0.4

96.0
12.4

0.61
56,427

15.9

2.2

18

 
 
0.75 to <2.50
23.1

1.1

61.8
23.9

1.33
129,916

22.0

8.8

37
0.1

 
 
2.50 to <10.00
6.4

0.2

93.6
6.6

4.76
36,051

20.0

4.7

71
0.1

 
 
10.00 to <100.00
2.2

0.1

98.3
2.3

27.26
24,716

27.4

3.9

171
0.2

 
 
100.00 (Default)
3.8


78.5
3.8

100.00
35,131

39.7

1.6

42
1.5

 
 
Sub-total
231.6

16.7

82.9
249.0

2.14
1,409,388

16.6

36.5

15
1.9

0.2

0.3


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
89


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
AIRB – Qualifying revolving retail exposures
Original on-balance sheet gross exposure

Off-balance sheet exposures pre-CCF

Average CCF
EAD post-CRM and post-CCF

Average PD
Number of obligors

Average LGD
Average maturity

RWA

RWA density
EL

Individual impairments

Collective impairments

PD scale
$bn

$bn

%
$bn

%
 
%
yrs

$bn

%
$bn

$bn

$bn

0.00 to <0.15
4.9

62.5

47.4
34.4

0.07
11,894,411

93.7

1.5

4

 
 
0.15 to <0.25
1.3

12.0

44.0
6.5

0.21
1,824,704

95.0

0.8

11

 
 
0.25 to <0.50
2.1

9.0

42.9
5.9

0.37
1,732,829

93.3

1.0

17

 
 
0.50 to <0.75
2.0

4.0

50.2
3.9

0.60
1,069,619

93.4

1.0

26

 
 
0.75 to <2.50
5.5

6.6

47.3
8.6

1.39
1,991,102

91.4

4.0

48
0.1

 
 
2.50 to <10.00
2.9

1.4

57.8
3.7

4.78
679,874

89.9

4.2

112
0.2

 
 
10.00 to <100.00
0.8

0.3

55.7
0.9

28.87
268,254

91.7

2.1

219
0.3

 
 
100.00 (Default)
0.1


6.3
0.1

100.00
26,142

36.0

0.1

148

 
 
Sub-total
19.6

95.8

46.8
64.0

1.14
19,486,935

93.1

14.7

23
0.6


0.2

 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
AIRB – Other SME
Original on-balance sheet gross exposure

Off-balance sheet exposures pre-CCF

Average CCF
EAD post-CRM and post-CCF

Average PD
Number of obligors

Average LGD
Average maturity

RWA

RWA density
EL

Individual impairments

Collective impairments

PD scale
$bn

$bn

%
$bn

%
 
%
yrs

$bn

%
$bn

$bn

$bn

0.00 to <0.15
0.1

0.1

67.4
0.2

0.10
82,891

39.9


9

 
 
0.15 to <0.25
0.2

0.2

53.4
0.3

0.22
91,588

61.2

0.1

22

 
 
0.25 to <0.50
0.3

0.4

51.2
0.6

0.38
141,288

63.1

0.2

32

 
 
0.50 to <0.75
0.4

0.5

66.5
0.8

0.63
157,268

58.0

0.3

38

 
 
0.75 to <2.50
2.0

1.3

60.8
2.8

1.58
427,912

58.8

1.5

55

 
 
2.50 to <10.00
2.3

0.8

69.9
2.8

4.90
201,537

53.6

1.8

64
0.1

 
 
10.00 to <100.00
0.5

0.1

70.1
0.6

17.66
69,516

66.6

0.6

106
0.1

 
 
100.00 (Default)
0.6

0.1

94.5
0.6

100.00
21,873

39.5


3
0.3

 
 
Sub-total
6.4

3.5

63.4
8.7

10.84
1,193,873

56.1

4.5

52
0.5

0.3


 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
AIRB – Other non-SME
Original on-balance sheet gross exposure

Off-balance sheet exposures pre-CCF

Average CCF
EAD post-CRM and post-CCF

Average PD
Number of obligors

Average LGD
Average maturity

RWA

RWA density
EL

Individual impairments

Collective impairments

PD scale
$bn

$bn

%
$bn

%
 
%
yrs

$bn

%
$bn

$bn

$bn

0.00 to <0.15
9.5

6.1

34.4
11.9

0.07
442,581

20.0

0.5

5

 
 
0.15 to <0.25
6.0

2.7

35.8
7.3

0.20
393,748

31.2

1.0

14

 
 
0.25 to <0.50
5.4

2.9

29.6
6.3

0.36
276,509

29.9

1.2

19

 
 
0.50 to <0.75
4.0

1.2

29.1
4.5

0.60
176,642

29.3

1.1

24

 
 
0.75 to <2.50
8.7

0.6

31.7
9.1

1.37
345,838

28.9

3.2

35

 
 
2.50 to <10.00
2.8

1.0

26.8
3.2

4.31
188,614

39.5

1.9

61
0.1

 
 
10.00 to <100.00
0.7


17.1
0.8

25.11
79,970

65.7

1.1

138
0.1

 
 
100.00 (Default)
0.4


52.1
0.5

100.00
58,697

55.4

0.1

13
0.3

 
 
Sub-total
37.5

14.5

32.6
43.6

2.26
1,962,599

28.7

10.1

23
0.5

0.1

0.2

 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
Retail AIRB Total
Original on-balance sheet gross exposure

Off-balance sheet exposures pre-CCF

Average CCF
EAD post-CRM and post-CCF

Average PD
Number of obligors

Average LGD
Average maturity

RWA

RWA density
EL

Individual impairments

Collective impairments

PD scale
$bn

$bn

%
$bn

%
 
%
yrs

$bn

%
$bn

$bn

$bn

Total (all portfolios)
296.6

130.6

50.3
366.8

2.19
24,060,113

32.3

66.1

18
3.5

0.6

0.7


90
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
FIRB – Central government and central banks
Original on-balance sheet gross exposure

Off-balance sheet exposures pre-CCF

Average CCF
EAD post-CRM and post-CCF

Average PD
Number of obligors

Average LGD
Average maturity

RWA

RWA density
EL

Individual impairments

Collective impairments

PD scale
$bn

$bn

%
$bn

%
 
%
yrs

$bn

%
$bn

$bn

$bn

0.00 to <0.15


75.0
0.1

0.04
1

45.0
5.00


32

 
 
0.15 to <0.25







 
 
0.25 to <0.50







 
 
0.50 to <0.75







 
 
0.75 to <2.50







 
 
2.50 to <10.00







 
 
10.00 to <100.00







 
 
100.00 (Default)







 
 
Sub-total


75.0
0.1

0.04
1

45.0
5.00


32



 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
FIRB – Institutions
Original on-balance sheet gross exposure

Off-balance sheet exposures pre-CCF

Average CCF
EAD post-CRM and post-CCF

Average PD
Number of obligors

Average LGD
Average maturity

RWA

RWA density
EL

Individual impairments

Collective impairments

PD scale
$bn

$bn

%
$bn

%
 
%
yrs

$bn

%
$bn

$bn

$bn

0.00 to <0.15
0.1


45.2
0.1

0.06
2

45.0
2.75


23

 
 
0.15 to <0.25


20.7

0.22

45.0
3.82


62

 
 
0.25 to <0.50
0.1


75.0
0.2

0.37
1

45.0
1.71

0.1

55

 
 
0.50 to <0.75







 
 
0.75 to <2.50







 
 
2.50 to <10.00







 
 
10.00 to <100.00







 
 
100.00 (Default)







 
 
Sub-total
0.2


46.6
0.3

0.26
3

45.0
2.09

0.1

43



 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
FIRB – Corporate – Other
Original on-balance sheet gross exposure

Off-balance sheet exposures pre-CCF

Average CCF
EAD post-CRM and post-CCF

Average PD
Number of obligors

Average LGD
Average maturity

RWA

RWA density
EL

Individual impairments

Collective impairments

PD scale
$bn

$bn

%
$bn

%
 
%
yrs

$bn

%
$bn

$bn

$bn

0.00 to <0.15
8.6

12.2

40.5
13.5

0.09
1,316

44.6
2.45

3.8

28

 
 
0.15 to <0.25
3.1

5.7

39.2
5.3

0.22
1,303

44.9
2.22

2.4

46

 
 
0.25 to <0.50
4.5

5.2

32.2
6.1

0.37
1,549

42.8
1.96

3.5

57

 
 
0.50 to <0.75
3.3

5.2

30.9
4.9

0.63
1,140

43.4
1.98

3.6

72

 
 
0.75 to <2.50
6.7

9.7

26.5
9.0

1.35
2,817

43.1
1.67

8.3

91
0.1

 
 
2.50 to <10.00
2.3

2.2

28.2
2.8

4.65
1,312

42.9
1.90

3.8

138
0.1

 
 
10.00 to <100.00
0.2

0.2

15.2
0.3

15.99
180

41.4
0.90

0.4

175

 
 
100.00 (Default)
0.4

0.1

45.8
0.5

100.00
414

44.9
1.43


0.2

 
 
Sub-total
29.1

40.5

33.9
42.4

1.95
10,031

43.8
2.07

25.8

61
0.4

0.3

0.1

 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
FIRB – Total
Original on-balance sheet gross exposure

Off-balance sheet exposures pre-CCF

Average CCF
EAD post-CRM and post-CCF

Average PD
Number of obligors

Average LGD
Average maturity

RWA

RWA density
EL

Individual impairments

Collective impairments

 
$bn

$bn

%
$bn

%
 
%
yrs

$bn

%
$bn

$bn

$bn

Total (all portfolios)
29.3

40.5

34.0
42.8

1.94
10,035

43.8
2.1

25.9

61
0.4

0.3

0.1


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
91


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 56a: Specialised lending – other than HVCRE – Slotting only
Regulatory categories
Remaining maturity
On-balance sheet amount

Off-balance sheet amount

RW

Exposure amount
RWA

Expected losses

PF

OF

CF

IPRE

Total

 
 
$bn

$bn

%

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

Strong
Less than 2.5 years
9.1

1.5

50

0.3



9.6

9.9

5.0


 
Equal to or more than 2.5 years
12.6

1.5

70

0.1

0.6


13.0

13.7

9.5

0.1

Good
Less than 2.5 years
2.9

0.4

70


0.3


2.8

3.1

2.1


 
Equal to or more than 2.5 years
2.8

0.1

90


0.3


2.5

2.8

2.5


Satisfactory
Less than 2.5 years
0.5


115


0.1


0.4

0.5

0.6


 
Equal to or more than 2.5 years
0.9


115

0.2

0.4


0.3

0.9

1.0


Weak
Less than 2.5 years
0.3


250

0.1



0.2

0.3

0.8


 
Equal to or more than 2.5 years
0.1


250




0.1

0.1

0.3


Default
Less than 2.5 years
0.5




0.1


0.7

0.8


0.5

 
Equal to or more than 2.5 years
0.3




0.3


0.1

0.4


0.2

Total
 
30.0

3.5

 
0.7

2.1


29.7

32.5

21.8

0.8


Table 56b: Specialised lending – HVCRE – Slotting only
Regulatory categories
Remaining maturity
On-balance sheet amount

Off-balance sheet amount

RW
Exposure amount

RWA

Expected losses

 
 
$bn

$bn

%
$bn

$bn

$bn

Strong
Less than 2.5 years
0.2

0.1

70
0.3

0.2


 
Equal to or more than 2.5 years


95



Good
Less than 2.5 years
0.3


95
0.3

0.2


 
Equal to or more than 2.5 years


120



Satisfactory
Less than 2.5 years


115



 
Equal to or more than 2.5 years


115



Weak
Less than 2.5 years


250



 
Equal to or more than 2.5 years


250



Default
Less than 2.5 years





 
Equal to or more than 2.5 years





Total
 
0.5

0.1

 
0.6

0.4



Table 57: Analysis of counterparty credit risk (CCR) exposure by approach (excluding centrally cleared exposures)
 
 
 
a
b
c
d
e
f
 
 
Footnote
Replacement cost

Potential future exposure

EEPE

Alpha used for computing regulatory EAD

EAD post-CRM

RWA

 
 
 
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1
SA-CCR (for derivatives)
1
27.5

43.5





71.0

28.0

2
Internal Model Method (for derivatives and SFTs)
 


 
19.9

1.4

27.9

10.9

3
Simple Approach for credit risk mitigation (for SFTs)
 










4
Comprehensive Approach for credit risk mitigation (for SFTs)
 








38.3

7.3

5
VaR for SFTs
 










6
Total
 
27.5

43.6

19.9

1.4

137.2

46.2

1
Prior to the implementation of SA-CCR, Exposures reported here will be those under the mark-to-market method.
Table 58: Credit valuation adjustment (CVA) capital charge
 
 
a
b
 
 
EAD post-CRM

RWA

 
 
$bn

$bn

1
Total portfolios subject to the Advanced CVA capital charge
12.8

3.5

2
– VaR component (including the 3×multiplier)


0.8

3
– stressed VaR component (including the 3×multiplier)


2.7

4
All portfolios subject to the Standardised CVA capital charge
41.6

10.9

5
Total subject to the CVA capital charge
54.4

14.4



92
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 59: Standardised approach – CCR exposures by regulatory portfolio and risk weights
 
 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Risk weight
 
0%

10%

20%

50%

75%

100%

150%

Others

Total credit exposure

Asset Classes
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Central governments and central banks
 
7.3








7.3

Institutions
 



0.2





0.2

Corporates
 



0.1


2.5



2.6

Total
 
7.3



0.3


2.5



10.1

Table 60: IRB – CCR exposures by portfolio and PD scale
PD scale
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
EAD post-CRM

Average PD
Number of obligors

Average LGD
Average maturity

RWA

RWA density
IRB advanced: Central Government and Central Banks
$bn

%

%
yrs

$bn

%
0.00 to <0.15
11.7

0.04
104

45.3
1.00

1.1

8
0.15 to <0.25
0.2

0.22
4

45.0
1.00

0.1

32
0.25 to <0.50

0.37
5

45.0
0.20


38
0.50 to <0.75

0.63
5

45.0
0.20


55
0.75 to <2.50

1.34
12

41.2
2.80


111
2.50 to <10.00
0.4

4.20
3

45.0
0.90

0.5

10.00 to <100.00




100.00 (Default)




Sub-total
12.3

0.19
133

45.3
1.00

1.7

13
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
IRB advanced: Institutions
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
0.00 to <0.15
48.5

0.06
3,473

45.2
1.30

10.8

22
0.15 to <0.25
5.9

0.22
295

46.9
1.60

3.0

51
0.25 to <0.50
1.6

0.37
133

45.0
1.40

0.9

61
0.50 to <0.75
0.7

0.63
69

45.0
0.60

0.5

70
0.75 to <2.50
0.6

1.07
144

45.1
1.50

0.6

104
2.50 to <10.00
0.1

4.64
31

45.0
2.30

0.1

186
10.00 to <100.00
0.1

28.13
17

53.4
2.10

0.2

329
100.00 (Default)




Sub-total
57.5

0.14
4,162

45.3
1.40

16.1

28
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
IRB advanced: Corporates
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
0.00 to <0.15
30.9

0.07
5,839

41.6
1.90

7.5

24
0.15 to <0.25
7.3

0.22
1,870

46.3
1.90

3.7

51
0.25 to <0.50
3.4

0.37
1,131

47.1
1.70

2.1

62
0.50 to <0.75
3.3

0.63
968

43.3
1.40

2.6

79
0.75 to <2.50
5.7

1.35
3,112

46.3
1.40

6.1

107
2.50 to <10.00
0.7

4.24
693

47.6
1.70

1.2

171
10.00 to <100.00
0.1

24.67
121

49.9
2.00

0.3

300
100.00 (Default)
0.1

100.00
46

45.4
4.20


Sub-total
51.5

0.66
13,780

43.8
1.80

23.5

46
Total (sum of all IRB Advanced)
121.3

0.34
18,075

44.5
1.50

41.3

34
PD scale
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
EAD post-CRM

Average PD
Number of obligors

Average LGD
Average maturity

RWA

RWA density
IRB foundation: Corporates
$bn

%


%
yrs

$bn

%
0.00 to <0.15
4.2

0.06
553

45.0
1.90

0.9

23
0.15 to <0.25
0.3

0.22
137

45.0
2.20

0.1

48
0.25 to <0.50
0.3

0.37
160

45.0
1.70

0.2

58
0.50 to <0.75
0.4

0.63
96

45.0
1.70

0.3

73
0.75 to <2.50
0.3

1.35
496

45.0
2.20

0.3

108
2.50 to <10.00

4.61
79

45.0
2.00

0.1

151
10.00 to <100.00

13.52
10

45.0
1.00


218
100.00 (Default)

100.00
7

45.0
1.20


Total (sum of all IRB Foundation)
5.5

0.20
1,538

45.0
1.91

1.9

35

HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
93


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Table 61: Composition of collateral for CCR exposure
 
 
a
b
c
d
e
f
 
 
Collateral used in derivative transactions
Collateral used in SFTs
 
 
Fair value of collateral received
Fair value of posted collateral
Fair value of collateral received

Fair value of posted collateral

 
 
Segregated

Unsegregated

Segregated

Unsegregated

 
 
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1
Cash – domestic currency

5.2

2.0

3.0

42.9

73.1

2
Cash – other currencies

38.9

4.7

32.4

148.7

227.5

3
Domestic sovereign debt

4.2


7.1

64.5

49.1

4
Other sovereign debt

8.9


9.4

186.7

131.9

5
Government agency debt

0.3


0.2

7.8

2.3

6
Corporate bonds

0.4



23.7

11.1

7
Equity securities




39.5

34.4

8
Other collateral

0.1


0.2

2.0

7.6

9
Total

58.0

6.7

52.3

515.8

537.0

Table 62: Exposures to central counterparties
 
 
a
b
 
 
EAD post-CRM

RWA

 
 
$bn

$bn

1
Exposures to QCCPs (total)
34.0

1.2

2
Exposures for trades at QCCPs (excluding initial margin and default fund contributions)
20.7

0.4

 
– of which:
 
 
3
OTC derivatives
10.4

0.2

4
Exchange-traded derivatives
7.2

0.1

5
Securities financing transactions
3.1

0.1

6
Netting sets where cross-product netting has been approved


7
Segregated initial margin
6.7


8
Non-segregated initial margin
6.6

0.1

9
Pre-funded default fund contributions

0.7

10
Unfunded default fund contributions


11
Exposures to non-QCCPs (total)
0.3

0.4

12
Exposures for trades at non-QCCPs (excluding initial margin and default fund contributions)
0.3

0.4

 
– of which:
 
 
13
OTC derivatives
0.3

0.4

14
Exchange-traded derivatives


15
Securities financing transactions


16
Netting sets where cross-product netting has been approved


17
Segregated initial margin


18
Non-segregated initial margin


19
Pre-funded default fund contributions


20
Unfunded default fund contributions


Table 63: Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book
 
 
a
b
c
e
f
g
i
j
k
 
 
Bank acts as originator
Bank acts as sponsor
Bank acts as investor
 
 
Traditional

Synthetic

Sub-Total

Traditional

Synthetic

Sub-Total

Traditional

Synthetic

Sub-Total

 
 
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1
Retail (total)
0.1


0.1

17.3


17.3

2.7


2.7

 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2
residential mortgage



0.1


0.1

2.3


2.3

3
credit card









4
other retail exposures



17.2


17.2

0.4


0.4

5
re-securitisation
0.1


0.1







6
Wholesale (total)
1.2

4.7

5.9

5.4


5.4

3.8


3.8

 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7
loans to corporates

4.7

4.7







8
commercial mortgage






2.9


2.9

9
lease and receivables









10
other wholesale






0.8


0.8

11
re-securitisation
1.2


1.2

5.4


5.4

0.1


0.1


94
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 64: Securitisation exposures in the trading book
 
 
a
b
c
e
f
g
i
j
k
 
 
Bank acts as originator
Bank acts as sponsor
Bank acts as investor
 
 
Traditional
Synthetic
Sub-Total
Traditional
Synthetic
Sub-Total
Traditional
Synthetic
Sub-Total
 
 
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1
Retail (total)






1.5


1.5

 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2
residential mortgage






0.6


0.6

3
credit card









4
other retail exposures






0.9


0.9

5
re-securitisation









6
Wholesale (total)






1.0


1.0

 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7
loans to corporates






0.1


0.1

8
commercial mortgage






0.7


0.7

9
lease and receivables









10
other wholesale






0.1


0.1

11
re-securitisation






0.1


0.1

 
 
Table 65: Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated regulatory capital requirements – bank acting as originator or as sponsor
 
 
 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
 
 
 
Exposure values (by RW bands)
Exposure values (by regulatory approach)
 
 
 
≤20% RW

>20% to 50% RW

>50% to 100% RW

>100% to 1250% RW

1250% RW

IRB RBA (including IAA)

IRB SFA

SA

1250
%
 
 
 
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 
2
Traditional securitisation
16.7

2.0

0.2

0.2

4.9

18.9


0.2

4.9

 
3
– securitisation
16.7

0.4

0.1

0.1


17.2


0.2


 
 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
4
retail underlying
16.7

0.4

0.1

0.1


17.2


0.2


 
5
wholesale









 
6
– re-securitisation

1.6

0.1

0.1

4.9

1.7



4.9

 
 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7
senior









 
8
non-senior

1.6

0.1

0.1

4.9

1.7



4.9

 
9
Synthetic securitisation
4.3


0.4



4.7




 
10
– securitisation
4.3


0.4



4.7




 
 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
11
retail underlying









 
12
wholesale
4.3


0.4



4.7




 
13
– re-securitisation









 
 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
14
senior









 
15
non-senior









 
1
Total exposures
21.0

2.0

0.6

0.2

4.9

23.6


0.2

4.9



HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
95


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Table 65: Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated regulatory capital requirements – bank acting as originator or as sponsor (continued)
 
 
 
 
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
 
 
 
RWA (by regulatory approach)
Capital charge after cap
 
 
 
IRB RBA (including IAA)

IRB SFA

SA

1250
%
IRB RBA (including IAA)

IRB SFA

SA

1250
%
 
 
 
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 
2
Traditional securitisation
2.6


0.2

58.8

0.2



1.2

 
3
– securitisation
1.6


0.2


0.1




 
 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
4
retail underlying
1.6


0.2


0.1




 
5
wholesale








 
6
– re-securitisation
1.0



58.8

0.1



1.2

 
 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7
senior








 
8
non-senior
1.0



58.8

0.1



1.2

 
9
Synthetic securitisation
0.9



0.4

0.1




 
10
– securitisation
0.9



0.4

0.1




 
 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
11
retail underlying








 
12
wholesale
0.9



0.4

0.1




 
13
– re-securitisation








 
 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
14
senior








 
15
non-senior








 
1
Total exposures
3.5


0.2

59.2

0.3



1.2

 
Table 66: Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated capital requirements – bank acting as investor
 
 
 
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
 
 
 
Exposure values (by RW bands)
Exposure values (by regulatory approach)
 
 
 
≤20% RW

>20% to 50% RW

>50% to 100% RW

>100% to 1250% RW

1250% RW

IRB RBA (including IAA)

IRB SFA

SA

1250
%
 
 
 
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 
2
Traditional securitisation
4.9

0.3

1.2


0.1

5.6


0.8

0.1

 
3
– securitisation
4.9

0.2

1.1


0.1

5.4


0.8

0.1

 
 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
4
retail underlying
2.5

0.1



0.1

2.4


0.1

0.1

 
5
wholesale
2.4

0.1

1.1



3.0


0.7


 
6
– re-securitisation

0.1

0.1



0.2




 
 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7
senior


0.1



0.1




 
8
non-senior

0.1




0.1




 
9
Synthetic securitisation









 
10
– securitisation









 
 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
11
retail underlying









 
12
wholesale









 
13
– re-securitisation









 
 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
14
senior









 
15
non-senior









 
1
Total exposures
4.9

0.3

1.2


0.1

5.6


0.8

0.1



96
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Table 66: Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated capital requirements – bank acting as investor (continued)
 
 
 
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
 
 
RWA (by regulatory approach)
Capital charge after cap
 
 
IRB RBA (including IAA)

IRB SFA

SA

1250
%
IRB RBA (including IAA)

IRB SFA

SA

1250
%
 
 
$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

2
Traditional securitisation
1.2


0.7

1.3

0.1


0.1

0.1

3
– securitisation
1.1


0.7

1.1

0.1


0.1

0.1

 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
4
retail underlying
0.3



1.0




0.1

5
wholesale
0.8


0.7

0.1

0.1


0.1


6
– re-securitisation
0.1



0.2





 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7
senior








8
non-senior
0.1



0.2





9
Synthetic securitisation








10
– securitisation








 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
11
retail underlying








12
wholesale








13
– re-securitisation








 
– of which:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
14
senior








15
non-senior








1
Total exposures
1.2


0.7

1.3

0.1


0.1

0.1



HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
97


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Appendix II
Simplified organisation chart for regulatory purposes1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC Holdings plc
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UK
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
99
%
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC
Mexico
S.A.
 
 
HSBC
North America Holdings Inc.
 
HSBC
Bank
Canada
 
 
HSBC
Bank (China)
Company
Limited
 
The Hongkong and Shanghai Banking Corporation Limited
 
 
HSBC
Bank Australia
Limited
 
 
HSBC
Bank
Egypt
S.A.E.

 
 
HSBC
Bank
plc

 
HSBC
Private
Banking
Holdings
(Suisse) SA
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
94%
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HK
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UK

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC
Finance
Corporation
 
 
Bank of Commun-ications Co. Limited (‘BoCom’)3
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC Bank Malaysia Berhad
 
 
The Saudi British Bank
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC
Private
Bank
(Suisse)
SA
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
19%
 
 
 
 
40%
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
USA
 
 
 
PRC
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC
Securities
(USA)
Inc.
 
 
Hang
Seng
Bank
Limited
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC Bank (Taiwan) Limited
 
 
HSBC Bank
Middle
East
Limited
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC
Trinkaus &
Burkhardt
AG
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
62%
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
80
%
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HK
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UAE
 
 
 
 
 
Germany
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC
USA
Inc.
 
HSBC
Bank
USA,
N.A.
 
 
Hang
Seng
Bank (China) Limited
 
 
 
 
 
PT
Bank
HSBC
Indonesia
 
 
Middle
East
and
North
Africa
 
 
 
 
HSBC
France
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
99
%
 
 
 
 
 
99
%
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC
Bank
(Singapore)
Limited
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
99
%
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC
Seguros
S.A.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Hang
Seng
Insurance
Company
Limited
 
HSBC
Insurance
(Asia-Pacific)
Holdings
Limited
 
 
HSBC
Insurance
(Singapore)
Pte
Limited
 
 
HSBC
Life
(UK)
Limited
 
 
 
 
HSBC
Assurances
Vie
(France)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Mexico
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HK
 
 
HK
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC
Life
Insurance
Company
Limited
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC
Amanah
Takaful
(Malaysia)
Sendirian
Berhad
 
 
Regency
Assets
Limited
 
 
 
 
 
Mazarin
Funding
Limited
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
50%
49
%
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Latin America
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
PRC
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HSBC
Life
(Inter-
national)
Limited
 
 
 
 
 
 
Turquoise
Receivables
Trustee
Limited
 
 
 
 
 
Barion
Funding
Limited
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HK
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Malachite
Funding
Limited
 
 
 
 
 
Metrix
Portfolio
Distribution
plc
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Entities deconsolidated for regulatory purposes

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
North America and LatAm
 
 
Asia
 
 
Europe and MENA
 
 
Holding company
 
Intermediate holding company
 
Operating company
 
Associate
 
Insurance company
 
Special purpose entities2
1
At 31 December 2016, showing entities in Priority markets, wholly owned unless shown otherwise (part ownership rounded down to nearest per cent), except 2, below.
2
Control of Special Purpose Entities is not based on ownership.
3
Treated under a capital deduction method for regulatory purposes.

98
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Appendix III
Asset encumbrance
The following is the disclosure of on-balance sheet encumbered and unencumbered assets and off-balance sheet collateral (represented by median values of monthly data points in 2016) based on the requirement in Part Eight of CRD IV. The related Guideline, issued by the EBA on 27 June 2014, was implemented by the PRA through Supervisory Statement SS11/14.
Table 67: A – Assets
 
 
 
 
 
 
Carrying amount of encumbered assets

Fair value of encumbered assets

Carrying amount of unencumbered assets

Fair value of unencumbered assets

 
 
   $m

   $m

   $m

   $m

010
Assets of the reporting institution
137,377


2,480,100


030
Equity instruments
5,283

5,283

55,216

55,116

040
Debt securities
66,493

66,486

482,518

480,801

120
Other assets
2,600


488,695


Table 67: B – Collateral received
 
 
 
 
Fair value of encumbered
collateral received or own debt securities issued

Fair value of collateral received or own debt securities issued available for encumbrance

 
 
   $m

      $m

130
Assets of the reporting institution
127,760

148,592

150
Equity instruments
6,661

18,561

160
Debt securities
121,102

126,002

230
Other collateral received
35

772

240
Own debt securities issued other than own covered bonds or ABSs


Table 67: C – Encumbered assets/collateral received and associated liabilities
 
 


Matching liabilities, contingent liabilities or securities lent
Assets, collateral received and own debt securities issued other than covered bonds and ABSs encumbered
 
 
   $m
      $m
010
Carrying amount of selected financial liabilities
199,108
257,264
Information on importance of encumbrance
We are a deposit-led bank and hence the majority of our funding is from customer current accounts and customer savings deposits payable on demand or at short notice. This is part of our Group framework, where we have defined the limit for the ratio of advances to deposits to be below 90% (2016: 68%). Given this structural unsecured funding position we have little requirement to fund ourselves in secured markets, and therefore our overall low level of encumbrance reflects this position. However, we do provide collateralised financing services to clients as part of our GB&M business model,
 
providing cash financing or specific securities, and these result in off-balance sheet encumbrance. The other sources which contribute to encumbrance are securities pledged in derivative transactions, mostly for hedging purposes, issuance of asset-backed securities, and covered bond programmes in the UK, France and Australia. HSBC Holdings ALCO reviews the asset encumbrance of the institution as a whole quarterly and any events changing the asset encumbrance level are examined.
For details on balance sheet encumbered and unencumbered assets, please refer to the Annual Report and Accounts 2016, page 148.



HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
99


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


Appendix IV
Summary of disclosures withheld

CRD IV reference
Description
Rationale
442(c)
CRAs – In relation to exposure to credit risk and dilution risk, the total amount of exposures after accounting offsets and without taking into account the effects of credit risk mitigation.
Materiality
The disclosure has been made after taking into account the effects of credit risk mitigation; there are no significant differences between exposures pre- and post-credit risk mitigation at exposure class level.
448(a)
Key assumptions (including assumptions regarding loan prepayments and behaviour of non-maturity deposits) on their exposure to interest rate risk on positions not included in the trading book.
Proprietary
Assumptions regarding fixed term loan repayments and term behaviouralisation of non-maturity deposits and capital drive HSBC’s structural interest rates positioning and market hedging requirements.
Disclosure could give key business strategy information to our competitors.



100
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Other Information
Abbreviations

The following abbreviated terms are used throughout this document.
Currencies
 
$
United States dollar
 
 
A
 
ABCP
Asset-backed commercial paper
ABS1
Asset-backed security
AFS1
Available-for-sale
ALCM
Asset, Liability and Capital Management
ALCO
Asset and Liability Management Committee
AT1 capital
Additional tier 1 capital
AVA
Additional value adjustment
 
 
B
 
BCBS
Basel Committee on Banking Supervision
BoCom
Bank of Communications Co., Limited
BSM
Balance Sheet Management
 
 
C
 
CCB1
Capital conservation buffer
CCF1
Credit conversion factor
CCP
Central counterparty
CCR1
Counterparty credit risk
CCyB1
Countercyclical capital buffer
CDS1
Credit default swap
CET11
Common equity tier 1
CIU
Collective investment undertakings
CML1
Consumer and Mortgage Lending (US)
CRA1
Credit risk adjustment
CRD IV1
Capital Requirements Regulation and Directive
CRE1
Commercial real estate
CRM
Credit risk mitigation/mitigant
CRR1
Customer risk rating
CSA1
Credit Support Annex
CVA
Credit valuation adjustment
CVC
Conduct and Values Committee
 
 
E
 
EAD1
Exposure at default
EBA
European Banking Authority
EC
European Commission
ECA
Export Credit Agency
ECAI1
External Credit Assessment Institution
EEA
European Economic Area
EL1
Expected loss
EU
European Union
EVE1
Economic value of equity
 
 
F
 
FFVA
Funding Fair Value Adjustment
Fitch
Fitch Ratings
FPC1
Financial Policy Committee (UK)
FSB
Financial Stability Board
FSVC
Financial System Vulnerabilities Committee
 
 
G
 
GAC
Group Audit Committee
GB&M
Global Banking and Markets, a global business
GMB
Group Management Board
GPB
Global Private Banking, a global business
GRC
Group Risk Committee
Group
HSBC Holdings together with its subsidiary undertakings
G-SIB1
Global systemically important bank
G-SII
Global systemically important institution
 
 
 
H
 
HKMA
Hong Kong Monetary Authority
Hong Kong
The Hong Kong Special Administrative Region of the People’s Republic of China
HSBC
HSBC Holdings together with its subsidiary undertakings
 
 
I
 
IAA1
Internal Assessment Approach
ICAAP1
Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process
ICG
Individual capital guidance
IFRSs
International Financial Reporting Standards
ILAA
Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment
ILR
Inherent Liquidity Risk
IMA
Internal Models Approach
IMM1
Internal Model Method
IRB1/RBA
Internal ratings based approach
IRC1
Incremental risk charge
 
 
L
 
LCR
Liquidity Coverage Ratio
LFRF
Liquidity and Funding Risk Framework
LGD1
Loss given default
Libor
London interbank offered rate
 
 
M
 
MDB1
Multilateral Development Bank
MENA
Middle East and North Africa
MOC
Model Oversight Committee
Moody’s
Moody’s Investor Service
MREL
Minimum requirements for own funds and eligible liabilities
 
 
N
 
NCOA
Non-credit obligation asset
NSFR
Net Stable Funding Ratio
 
 
O
 
ORMF
Operational risk management framework
OTC1
Over-the-counter
 
 
P
 
PD1
Probability of default
PFE1
Potential future exposure
PIT1
Point-in-time
PRA1
Prudential Regulation Authority (UK)
PVA1
Prudent valuation adjustment
 
 
Q
 
QCCP
Qualifying Central Counterparty
 
 
R
 
RAS
Risk appetite statement
RBM1
Ratings Based Method
RBWM
Retail Bank and Wealth Management, a global business
Retail IRB1
Retail internal ratings based approach
RMM
Risk Management Meeting of the GMB
RNIV
Risks not in VaR
RWA1
Risk-weighted asset
 
 


HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
101


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016


S
 
SA/STD1
Standardised approach
SA-CCR
Standardised approach for counterparty credit risk
S&P
Standard and Poor’s rating agency
SFM1
Supervisory Formula Method
SFT1
Securities Financing Transactions
SIC
Securities Investment Conduit
SME
Small and medium-sized enterprise
SPE1
Special Purpose Entity
SRB1
Systemic Risk Buffer
SSFA/SFA
Simplified supervisory formula approach
 
 
T
 
TLAC1
Total Loss Absorbing Capacity
TTC1
Through-the-cycle
T1 capital
Tier 1 capital
T2 capital
Tier 2 capital
 
 
U
 
UK
United Kingdom
 
 
V
 
VaR1
Value at risk
1
Full definition included in the Glossary published on HSBC website www.hsbc.com


102
HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Cautionary statement regarding forward
looking statements
The Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures 2016 contains certain forward-looking statements with respect to HSBC’s financial condition, results of operations, capital position and business.
Statements that are not historical facts, including statements about HSBC’s beliefs and expectations, are forward-looking statements. Words such as ‘expects’, ‘anticipates’, ‘intends’, ‘plans’, ‘believes’, ‘seeks’, ‘estimates’, ‘potential’ and ‘reasonably possible’, variations of these words and similar expressions are intended to identify forward-looking statements. These statements are based on current plans, estimates and projections, and therefore undue reliance should not be placed on them. Forward-looking statements speak only as of the date they are made. HSBC makes no commitment to revise or update any forward-looking statements to reflect events or circumstances occurring or existing after the date of any forward-looking statements.
Written and/or oral forward-looking statements may also be made in the periodic reports to the US Securities and Exchange Commission, summary financial statements to shareholders, proxy statements, offering circulars and prospectuses, press releases and other written materials, and in oral statements made by HSBC’s Directors, officers or employees to third parties, including financial analysts.
Forward-looking statements involve inherent risks and uncertainties. Readers are cautioned that a number of factors could cause actual results to differ, in some instances materially, from those anticipated or implied in any forward-looking statement. These include, but are not limited to:
changes in general economic conditions in the markets in which we operate, such as continuing or deepening recessions and fluctuations in employment beyond those factored into consensus forecasts; changes in foreign exchange rates and interest rates; volatility in equity markets; lack of liquidity in wholesale funding markets; illiquidity and downward price pressure in national real estate markets; adverse changes in central banks’ policies with respect to the provision of liquidity support to financial markets; heightened market concerns over sovereign creditworthiness in over-indebted countries; adverse

 
changes in the funding status of public or private defined benefit pensions; and consumer perception as to the continuing availability of credit and price competition in the market segments we serve;
changes in government policy and regulation, including the monetary, interest rate and other policies of central banks and other regulatory authorities; initiatives to change the size, scope of activities and interconnectedness of financial institutions in connection with the implementation of stricter regulation of financial institutions in key markets worldwide; revised capital and liquidity benchmarks which could serve to deleverage bank balance sheets and lower returns available from the current business model and portfolio mix; imposition of levies or taxes designed to change business mix and risk appetite; the practices, pricing or responsibilities of financial institutions serving their consumer markets; expropriation, nationalisation, confiscation of assets and changes in legislation relating to foreign ownership; changes in bankruptcy legislation in the principal markets in which we operate and the consequences thereof; general changes in government policy that may significantly influence investor decisions; extraordinary government actions as a result of current market turmoil; other unfavourable political or diplomatic developments producing social instability or legal uncertainty which in turn may affect demand for our products and services; the costs, effects and outcomes of product regulatory reviews, actions or litigation, including any additional compliance requirements; and the effects of competition in the markets where we operate including increased competition from non-bank financial services companies, including securities firms; and
factors specific to HSBC, including discretionary RWA growth and our success in adequately identifying the risks we face, such as the incidence of loan losses or delinquency, and managing those risks (through account management, hedging and other techniques). Effective risk management depends on, among other things, our ability through stress testing and other techniques to prepare for events that cannot be captured by the statistical models it uses; and our success in addressing operational, legal and regulatory, and litigation challenges, notably compliance with the DPA.

Contacts
Enquiries relating to HSBC’s strategy or operations may be directed to:
Senior Manager Investor Relations
HSBC Holdings plc
8 Canada Square
London E14 5HQ
United Kingdom
Head of Investor Relations, Asia-Pacific
The Hongkong and Shanghai Banking Corporation Limited
1 Queen’s Road Central
Hong Kong
 
 
Telephone: +44 (0) 20 7991 3643
Telephone: +852 2822 4908
 
 
Email: investorrelations@hsbc.com
Email: investorrelations@hsbc.com.hk




HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
103


Capital and Risk Management Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2016

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.
 
HSBC Holdings plc
 
 

By:    /s/ Iain J Mackay
Name:    Iain J. Mackay
Title:    Group Finance Director
Date:    22 February 2017
 
 




HSBC Holdings plc Pillar 3 2016
104